| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | photos | labels | ||||||||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 1.84 MiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User Manual Regulatory | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB | January 22 2020 / July 20 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User Manual-Statement | Users Manual | 2.33 MiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.65 MiB | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Internal photos | Internal Photos | 1.06 MiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 393.19 KiB | January 22 2020 / July 20 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
External photo | External Photos | 607.71 KiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
ID Label | ID Label/Location Info | 536.98 KiB | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Label Location | ID Label/Location Info | 231.79 KiB | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Label Location Info | ID Label/Location Info | 48.13 KiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Label and location | ID Label/Location Info | 93.35 KiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Agent Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 63.03 KiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 90.22 KiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Class II Permissive Change Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 65.13 KiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Test Report-1 | RF Exposure Info | 4.81 MiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Test Report-2 | RF Exposure Info | 3.78 MiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Test Report-3 | RF Exposure Info | 4.28 MiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Test Report-Appendix D | RF Exposure Info | 2.71 MiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Test set-up Photo | Test Setup Photos | 477.25 KiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Test set-up Photo-Annex F | Test Setup Photos | 431.97 KiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release | ||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
STC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 79.96 KiB | April 20 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Class II Permissive Change Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 30.82 KiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 47.07 KiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
MPE Test Report | Test Report | 205.85 KiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Operational Description Antenna 1 | Operational Description | January 22 2020 | confidential | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Operational Description Antenna 2 | Operational Description | January 22 2020 | confidential | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Appendix B | Test Report | 1.33 MiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Appendix C | Test Report | 3.71 MiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
SAR Test Report | Test Report | 2.73 MiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 524.26 KiB | January 22 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Tune Up Procedure | Parts List/Tune Up Info | January 22 2020 | confidential | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 79.34 KiB | / March 04 2019 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Declaration of authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 49.53 KiB | / March 04 2019 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
FCC Modular Approval Request | Cover Letter(s) | 119.27 KiB | / March 04 2019 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
FCC CIIPC Declaration letter | Cover Letter(s) | 648.85 KiB | / March 04 2019 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Operational description | Operational Description | March 27 2019 | confidential | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Class II Permissive Change | Cover Letter(s) | 74.32 KiB | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Declaration of Identity Disabled HP UE | Cover Letter(s) | 71.57 KiB | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | BOM | Parts List/Tune Up Info | September 06 2018 | confidential | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Block Diagram | Block Diagram | September 06 2018 | confidential | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Schematics | Schematics | September 06 2018 | confidential | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | September 06 2018 / September 07 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
The declaration | Cover Letter(s) | 82.35 KiB | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | User Manual | Users Manual | 1.84 MiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release |
User Guide Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.microsoft.com. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: August 2018 Document Part Number: L11079-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Welcome ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 2 2 Components .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Labels ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4 3 Network connections ..................................................................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a wireless network ......................................................................................................................... 6 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................................. 6 Wireless button ................................................................................................................. 6 Operating system controls ............................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................................................... 7 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ............................................................................ 7 Using GPS (select products only) ........................................................................................................ 8 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................... 8 Connecting Bluetooth devices .......................................................................................... 8 Using NFC to share information (select products only) ...................................................................... 8 Sharing .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a wired network .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) ....................................................... 9 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ................................................................ 10 Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection ............................................. 10 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) ............. 11 Customizing MAC Address Pass Through .......................................................................................... 11 4 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 12 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 12 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) ..................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) ........................................................................................................ 13 Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) ....................................................................................................... 13 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) ................................................................................................. 14 One-finger slide (touch screen only) ................................................................................................. 15 vii Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 15 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) .......................................................................................... 15 5 Entertainment features ............................................................................................................................... 16 Using a camera (select products only) ................................................................................................................ 16 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting a microphone ................................................................................................................. 16 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 17 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ......................... 17 Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ....................... 18 Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) ........................................... 19 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 21 Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device ................................................................................. 21 Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport ...................................... 22 Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) ... 22 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) ................... 23 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) ...................... 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 24 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ................ 24 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 24 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 26 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 27 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 28 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 28 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 28 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 29 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 29 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 29 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 29 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 30 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 30 viii Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 30 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 30 7 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 31 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 31 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 33 Managing a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................ 33 Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 34 Using DriveLock Security Options ..................................................................................................... 35 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) ................................................... 35 Enabling Automatic DriveLock ..................................................................... 35 Disabling Automatic DriveLock .................................................................... 35 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ................................................ 36 Selecting manual DriveLock ........................................................................................... 36 Setting a DriveLock master password ......................................................... 37 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ......................................... 37 Disabling DriveLock ........................................................................................................ 38 Entering a DriveLock password ...................................................................................... 38 Changing a DriveLock password ..................................................................................... 38 Windows Hello (select products only) ................................................................................................................. 39 Using antivirus software ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Using firewall software ........................................................................................................................................ 39 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Client Security (select products only) .................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) .......................................................................... 40 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 40 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ............................................................................................... 41 Locating the fingerprint reader ......................................................................................................... 41 8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 42 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 42 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 42 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 42 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 43 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 43 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 44 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 44 ix Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 44 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 44 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 44 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ........................................................................................................... 46 Using Windows tools ........................................................................................................................................... 46 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ........................................................................................... 46 Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media .................................................................... 47 Before you begin ............................................................................................................. 47 Creating the recovery media ........................................................................................... 47 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media .......................................... 48 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 48 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 48 Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition ........................................... 48 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager ........................................................................................... 48 Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ................................................ 49 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 49 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 50 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ............................................................ 50 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ............................................................................................ 51 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 51 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 51 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 51 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 51 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 52 Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 52 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 52 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 53 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 54 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 55 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 55 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 55 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 56 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number
(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 56 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 56 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 56 x Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 57 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number
(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 58 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 58 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 58 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 62 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 63 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 63 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 63 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 63 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 63 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 64 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 64 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 64 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 65 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 65 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 65 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 65 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 65 United States ................................................................................................................... 66 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 66 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 66 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 67 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 67 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 67 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 67 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 68 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 68 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 68 xi Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 68 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 68 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 69 xii 1 Welcome After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:
TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Connect to the InternetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the Internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 6. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 39. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 12 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:
Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 46. 1 Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:
Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Electrical and mechanical safety information Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:
Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*
To access this document:
Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer
*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Welcome 2 Components Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:
Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc
(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:
Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component
(1)
(2) HP product name Product ID 4 Chapter 2 Components Component
(3)
(4) Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Labels 5 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:
WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations
(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:
Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as wireless button) Using the wireless controls Operating system controls Wireless button The computer may have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:
Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. 1. 2. or 6 Chapter 3 Network connections On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:
Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 1. 2. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:
If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:
If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:
1. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet Status section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Connecting to a wireless network 7 Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:
Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the NOTE:
on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:
devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. Using NFC to share information (select products only) Your computer supports Near Field Communication (NFC), which allows you to wirelessly share information between two NFC-enabled devices. Information is transferred by tapping the tapping area (antenna) of the 8 Chapter 3 Network connections 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. computer with the antenna of your phone or other device. With NFC and supported apps, you can share websites, transfer contact information, transfer payments, and print on NFC-enabled printers. NOTE: To locate the tapping area on your computer, see Components on page 3. Sharing 1. Confirm that the NFC function is enabled. Type wireless in the taskbar search box, and then select Turn wireless devices on or off. a. b. Confirm that the selection for NFC is On. 2. Tap the NFC tapping area with an NFC-enabled device. You may hear a sound when the devices connect. NOTE: To find the location of the antenna on the other NFC device, refer to your device instructions. 3. Follow any on-screen instructions to continue. Connecting to a wired network Select products may allow wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connection. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection may be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-
Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 10. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable or an optional docking device or expansion product. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:
1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. Connecting to a wired network 9 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:
TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection 1. Connect a network cable to the network jack on the computer, or on an optional docking device or expansion product. 3. 4. 5. 2. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Setup. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching and/or LAN/WWAN Auto Switching to turn off WLAN and/or WWAN connections when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 10 Chapter 3 Network connections Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through an Ethernet adapter. This address is enabled by default. Customizing MAC Address Pass Through 1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Setup. Tablets without keyboards:
2. 3. 4. 5. or Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) 11 4 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in one or more of the following ways:
Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately) Use an on-screen keyboard Use a pointing stick Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on the TouchPad or a touch screen (select products only). Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. 12 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger slide to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger tap to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the four-finger tap to open the action center. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 13 Tap four fingers on the Touchpad to open the action center and view current settings and notifications. Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) Use the three-finger swipe to view open windows and to switch between open windows and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. 14 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) 1. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Begin typing. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 15 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has a camera (integrated camera) that records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To access the camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio Connecting speakers You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select models) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out
(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 21. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:
Select the Start button, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in
(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a microphone to the microphone jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. 16 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:
Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-
out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:
and then select Sound. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:
1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed and DisplayPort port on the computer. Using video 17 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f1 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:
PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f1 the display state changes. NOTE:
For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C Thunderbolt device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external Thunderbolt device, connect the Thunderbolt device according to the following instructions:
1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C Thunderbolt port on the computer. 18 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external Thunderbolt device. Press fn+f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:
PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4 the display state changes. NOTE:
For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a VGA video device to your computer, you need an VGA cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. 1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. Using video 19 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:
PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:
For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:
1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 20 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:
PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:
For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:
Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:
Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device The Thunderbolt DisplayPort connects an optional high-resolution display device or a high-performance data device. This port delivers higher performance than the VGA external monitor port and improves digital connectivity. Using video 21 Install all the latest drivers for your Thunderbolt device before connecting the device to the NOTE:
Thunderbolt DisplayPort. Thunderbolt cable and Thunderbolt device (sold separately) must be compatible with Windows. To determine whether your device is Thunderbolt Certified for Windows, go to https://thunderbolttechnology.net/products. 1. Connect one end of the Thunderbolt DisplayPort cable to the Thunderbolt DisplayPort on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the digital display device. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:
PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4 the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of NOTE:
the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport MultiStream Transport (MST) allows you to connect multiple wired display devices to your computer by connecting to the VGA or DisplayPorts on your computer and also to the VGA or DisplayPorts on a hub or an external docking station. You can connect in several ways, depending on the type of graphics controller installed on your computer and whether or not your computer includes a built-in hub. Go to Device Manager to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an AMD graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 6 external display devices. NOTE: With an Nvidia graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 4 external display devices. 22 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 1. 2. 3. To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:
Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. To see all of your connected display devices, type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. If you don't see all of your connected displays, be sure that each is connected to the correct port on the hub. NOTE: Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which spans your computer screen across all enabled display devices. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an Intel graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 3 display devices. To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:
1. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. 2. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. 3. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the NOTE:
correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) With your internal hub and Intel graphics controller, you can connect up to 3 display devices in the following configurations:
Two 1920 x 1200 DP monitors connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station One 2560 x 1600 DP monitor connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:
1. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts (DP) on the computer base or the docking station. 2. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the NOTE:
correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Using video 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:
Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;
provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. To connect to Intel WiDi certified displays:
Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To open Intel WiDi:
Type Intel WiDi in the taskbar search box, and then click Intel WiDi. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 24 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Using data transfer 25 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 26. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 27. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:
Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:
Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the TouchPad (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password NOTE:
before your work returns to the screen. 26 Chapter 6 Managing power Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. Right-click the Power icon
, and then select Power Options. 2. 3. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:
Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows NOTE:
password before your work returns to the screen. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:
pressing the power button. Save your work and close all open programs. 1. 2. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 27 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:
Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon
. To use Power Options, rightclick the Power icon
, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by
+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:
When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon
. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:
1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:
HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:
Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:
The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or NOTE:
on page 28. The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options Running on battery power 29 The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:
If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. 1. 2. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:
AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the Windows Computer Setup utility (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized use of the computer HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*
Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*
Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive
(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*
Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)
*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. Protecting the computer 31 BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:
When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Password Function Administrator password*
Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. User password*
Protects access to a Windows user account.
*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 32 Chapter 7 Security Setting passwords in Computer Setup Password Function BIOS administrator password*
Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*
DriveLock user password*
If features have been enabled to prevent removing the NOTE:
BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.
*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:
Setting a new BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Setup. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password
(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Using passwords 33 2. 3. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Setup. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. 34 Chapter 7 Security Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator in order for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:
Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 35. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 36. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) A BIOS administrator password must be set before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:
1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Turn off the computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:
1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Using passwords 35 Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn off the tablet. 1. 2. 1. 2. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Selecting manual DriveLock CAUTION: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a master password must be set, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:
After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 36 Chapter 7 Security Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps:
1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Turn off the computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock, and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps:
1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Using passwords 37 Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling DriveLock 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:
Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:
Turn off the tablet. 1. 2. 1. 2. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:
Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. 5. 6. 7. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 38 Chapter 7 Security 5. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:
To add a password, select Add. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length, but it must consist of numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols checkbox. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you continue to use an antivirus program in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:
Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. 1. 2. 3. Windows Hello (select products only) 39 When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:
1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. This software can be accessed through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 40 Chapter 7 Security Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. In order to use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. Refer to the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. Locating the fingerprint reader The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:
Near the bottom of the TouchPad On the right side of the keyboard On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) 41 8 Maintenance It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance Using Disk Defragmenter You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:
It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:
Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:
Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 42 Chapter 8 Maintenance Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:
You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:
1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:
Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Updating programs and drivers 43 CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. 1. 2. 3. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Cleaning the sides or cover Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:
Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. 44 Chapter 8 Maintenance Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:
Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 45 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 1. 2. This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:
Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use HP Recovery Manager or HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool (select products only) to create recovery media (see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Removing the Recovery PartitionTo remove the Recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space
(select products only), select the Remove Recovery Partition option of HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 50. Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media, allowing you to restore from backup, refresh the computer, and reset the computer to its original state. NOTE:
If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) After you have successfully set up the computer, use HP Recovery Manager to create a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. This backup is called HP Recovery media. In cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced, the HP Recovery media can be used to reinstall the original operating system. To check for the presence of the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, right-click the Start button, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. If your computer does not list the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, contact NOTE:
support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 46 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering On select products, you can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For more information, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media on page 48. Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:
http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Before you begin Before you begin, note the following:
Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required media storage capacity. To create recovery media, use one of the following options:
NOTE:
If the computer does not have a recovery partition, HP Recovery Manager displays the Windows Create a Recovery Drive feature. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery image on a blank USB flash drive or hard drive. If your computer has an optical drive with DVD writer capability, be sure to use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs, which are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, as described above. If an external optical drive is used, you must connect it directly to a USB port on the computer. It cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. To create a recovery USB flash drive, use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt this process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery media. HP Recovery Manager will finish the current DVD or USB flash drive. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. Creating the recovery media To create HP Recovery media using HP Recovery Manager:
IMPORTANT:
beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. 1. 2. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) 47 1. 2. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media To create HP Recovery media using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool:
Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery Restoring and recovery can be performed using one or more of the following options: Windows tools, HP Recovery Manager, or the HP Recovery partition. IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 46. Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition You can use HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to restore the computer to the original factory state:
Resolving problems with preinstalled applications or driversTo correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver:
Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. Using System RecoveryTo recover the Windows partition to original factory content, select the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Using Factory Reset (select products only)Restores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and recreating the partitions and then reinstalling the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory (select products only). To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. If you have replaced the hard drive in the computer, you can use the Factory Reset option to NOTE:
install the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager You can use HP Recovery Manager software to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created HP Recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data that you want to retain. See Using Windows tools on page 46. 48 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. NOTE: When you start the recovery process, only the options available for your computer are displayed. Before you begin, note the following:
HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. If the computer hard drive fails, HP Recovery media must be used. This media is created using HP Recovery Manager. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, contact support to obtain recovery media. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:
IMPORTANT:
beginning these steps (select products only). For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, and then select Windows Recovery Environment. or For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:
Press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards:
Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f11. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:
boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. 2. 3. Recovering using HP Recovery media If your computer does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly, you can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Restoring and recovery 49 If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:
boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before To change the boot order:
IMPORTANT:
beginning these steps. 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:
Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. For tablets without keyboards:
or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP Recovery media. Before removing the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:
1. 2. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:
To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:
Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 1. 2. Using Computer Setup 51 NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:
If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 52. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:
Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:
1. 2. 3. 2. 3. 4. 52 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing NOTE:
any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:
Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:
1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:
Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup
(BIOS). NOTE:
If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:
Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 54 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 55. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:
Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:
a. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen NOTE:
If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. 3. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-
digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and then provide the Failure ID code. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. a. b. or or b. c. instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) 55 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:
product name or number. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:
Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:
Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:
For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 57. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:
If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. 56 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:
Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. 1. 2. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:
a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 57. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:
HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download UEFI Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:
product name or number. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:
Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information on Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or NOTE:
number. To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:
Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:
Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:
Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 58 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 59 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /
15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc
@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc
@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 60 Chapter 12 Specifications Operating environment Metric U.S. Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating
-20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 41F to 95F
-4F to 140F 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
-15 m to 3,048 m
-15 m to 12,192 m
-50 ft to 10,000 ft
-50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:
If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 62 Chapter 13 Electrostatic Discharge 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 64. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:
Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. Accessibility 63 HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?
Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products The following links provide information on accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 69. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:
Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) 64 Chapter 14 Accessibility Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:
Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information on key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe Standards and legislation 65 United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States www.section508.gov Buy Accessible Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:
The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Canada Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . 66 Chapter 14 Accessibility Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."
ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. CEN project team European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) Commission takes low profile on e-accessibility The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. United Kingdom W3C UK Policies Australia Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Standards and legislation 67 Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales 68 Chapter 14 Accessibility Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:
Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:
Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Contacting support 69
| 1 2 3 4 5 | User Manual Regulatory | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB | January 22 2020 / July 20 2020 | delayed release |
Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2018, 2019 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Fifth Edition: September 2019 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-005 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:
related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 4 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 5 China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 5 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 8
......................................................................................................................................... 8 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 8 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 9 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 10 v U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................................... 10 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 11 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 13 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 14 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 14 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 15 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 15 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 15 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 16 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 16 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 17 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 17 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 17 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 17 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 17 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 18 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 18 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 19 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 19 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 19 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 19 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 19 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 20 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 21 China altitude notice ......................................................................................................................... 21 China tropical warning notice ............................................................................................................ 21 vi Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ....................................................... 22 Taiwan eyesight notice ........................................................................................................................................ 22
....................................................................................................................... 22 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 23 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 23 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 23 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 23 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 23 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 24 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 24 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 24 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 26 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 26 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 26 China RoHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 29
................................................... 29
............................................................................................................................................... 30
(RoHS) ..................................................... 32
....................................................................................................... 32
(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 33
....................................................................................................... 33 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 34 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 34 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 34 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 34 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 35 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 36 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 37 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 38 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:
Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:
Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Accessing regulatory labels 1 If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:
Write to:
HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. Brazil notice Canada notices Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230V. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:
RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates
(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) Belarus regulatory notice 3 The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com. Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for IMPORTANT:
indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. IMPORTANT:
excluded in all countries reflected in the matrix. Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz Less than 1 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. Ergonomics notice When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit
(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-
mouse and monitor. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/
regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Australia and New Zealand notice 5 Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice
(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Singapore wireless notice 7 Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/
recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Factory-sealed battery notices 9 Modem notices U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-
distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:
Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:
If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:
New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:
12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 13 2 Safety notices Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:
Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. IMPORTANT:
If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:
crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Acoustics notice Battery notices Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. Heat-related safety warning notice 15 WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!
from children. WARNING!
immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!
explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices WARNING!
Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!
To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 For use in Norway Power cord set requirements This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-
pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:
The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/
18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices DC plug of external HP power supply Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-
discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Pinch hazard 19 Table 2-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices China safety notices China altitude notice 2000m Icon Description 2000m China tropical warning notice Icon Description China safety notices 21 Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan eyesight notice
(1) 30 10
(2) 2 2 1 22 Chapter 2 Safety notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 23 Taiwan battery recycling information Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:
A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:
Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available
(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/
powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances Mercury statement HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:
Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
(http://www.eiae.org). Chemical substances 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:
Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:
Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:
System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU 1. 2. 1. 2. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:
System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China RoHS
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
(Cr(VI))
I/O PCA
(LCD) CD/DVD/
/Java O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 29 SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572
"X" RoHS
"X" RoHS
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
(Cr(VI)) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O USB USB
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
(Cr(VI)) 30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA
(LCD) CD/DVD/
/Java USB USB 3D /
X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572
"X" RoHS
"X" RoHS O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 31
(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) Cables
Chassis/Other
I/O PCAs
(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %
Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides.
(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead Mercury Cadmium
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr
+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) Unit Cables
/ Chassis/Other
I/O PCAs
(LCD) Liquid crystal display
(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %
Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides.
(RoHS) 33 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/
itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Notebook or tablet PCs http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html Desktop PCs and Thin Clients Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?
jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico 35 TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. TCO Certified Edge 37 Symbols/Numerics notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 1 Index 32, 33 32, 33 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 21 B battery 15 battery notice 8, 9, 23 battery recycling 23 Belarus regulatory notice 3 Brazil notice 3, 17 C cable grounding notice 22 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 26 China PC energy label 26 D disposal notices battery 23 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 23 factory sealed battery 9 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 23 ENERGY STAR certification 24 environmental notices 23 equipment disposal notice 23 ergonomics notice 4, 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 34 G GS Notice 4, 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 16 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 34 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 34 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9, 16 Belarus regulatory 3 Brazil 3, 17 Canada 3 environmental 23 equipment disposal 23 ergonomics 4, 5 fan 16 headset and earphone volume level 16 India restriction of hazardous substances 34 Japan 6 Japan power cord 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 34 laser safety 9, 16 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 10 perchlorate material 26 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 8 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 20 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 10 modem statements notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 10, 11 modifications, notebook computers battery 23 Federal Communications Commission 2 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 8 TCO Certified Certification 36 F fan notice 16 Federal Communications Commission notebook computers cables 2 N New Zealand modem statement 12 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 9, 15, 23 38 Index TCO Certified Edge Certification 37 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 20 tropical warning notice 21 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 22 U U.S. modem statement 10, 11 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 16 W wireless LAN devices 2 Index 39
| 1 2 3 4 5 | User Manual-Statement | Users Manual | 2.33 MiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release |
Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2018, 2019 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Fourth Edition: April 2019 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-004 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:
related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 5 China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 5 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 8 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 8 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 9 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 10 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................................... 10 v U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 11 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 13 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 14 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 14 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 15 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 15 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 15 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 16 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 16 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 17 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 17 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 17 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 17 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 17 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 17 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 18 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 18 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 19 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 19 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 19 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 19 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 20 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 21 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 21 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 21 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 22 vi
......................................................................................................................................... 22 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 23 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 23 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 23 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 23 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 23 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 24 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 24 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 26 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 26 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers ................................... 29 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 29
..................................................................... 30 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-
ones, and point-of-sale terminals ....................................................................................................................... 31 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 31
(ROHS) .................................................................................................................................................................. 33
(RoHS) ..................................................... 35
....................................................................................................... 35
(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 36
....................................................................................................... 36 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 37 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 37 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 37 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 37 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 38 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 38 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 39 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 40 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 41 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:
Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:
Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Accessing regulatory labels 1 If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:
Write to:
HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-
GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:
Belarus regulatory notice 3 RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates
(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for IMPORTANT:
indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. IMPORTANT:
excluded in all countries reflected in the matrix. Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz Less than 1 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Ergonomics notice When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit
(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-
mouse and monitor. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/
regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Australia and New Zealand notice 5 Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice
(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Singapore wireless notice 7 Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/
recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Factory-sealed battery notices 9 Modem notices U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-
distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:
Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:
If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:
New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:
12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 13 2 Safety notices Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:
Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. IMPORTANT:
If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:
crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Acoustics notice Battery notices Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. Heat-related safety warning notice 15 WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!
from children. WARNING!
immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!
explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices WARNING!
Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!
To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 Power cord set requirements 1. 2. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-
pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:
The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m
(6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/
18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. DC plug of external HP power supply 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-
discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 2-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 Electric Service Equipment Pinch hazard 19 Table 2-1 Antenna Grounding (continued) Reference Grounding Component 2 3 4 5 6 7 Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices China safety notices China: Altitude notice 2000m Icon Description 2000m China: Tropical warning notice Icon Description China safety notices 21 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system.
(1) 30 10
(2) 2 2 1 22 Chapter 2 Safety notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 23 Taiwan battery recycling information Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:
A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:
Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available
(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/
powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances Mercury statement HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:
Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Chemical substances 25 China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:
Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:
Product Type Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:
System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU 1. 2. 1. 2. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:
System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products Part Name Lead (Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium
(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) Hazardous Substances Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display
(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power pack Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers 29 Hazardous Substances Mercury Cadmium Lead (Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium
(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
(Cr(VI)) Part Name TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards
I/O PCA
(LCD) CD/DVD/
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
/Java USB USB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-
ones, and point-of-sale terminals 31 Hazardous Substances Part Name Lead (Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium
(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) Flash memory card reader Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Fan Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones Heat sink I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display
(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Projector Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Solid-state drives Speakers, external Stylus Touch mat TV tuner USB flash memory drive X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Hazardous Substances Mercury Cadmium Lead (Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium
(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) Part Name USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards 3D Capture Stage/
Turntable
I/O PCA This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.
(ROHS)
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
(Cr(VI)) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
(ROHS) 33
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
(Cr(VI))
(LCD) CD/DVD/
/Java USB USB 3D /
X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices
(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) Cables
Chassis/Other
I/O PCAs
(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %
Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.
(RoHS) 35 http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides.
(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead Mercury Cadmium
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr
+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) Unit Cables
/ Chassis/Other
I/O PCAs
(LCD) Liquid crystal display
(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %
Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/
itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Notebook or tablet PCs http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html Desktop PCs and Thin Clients Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?
jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 37 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 38 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. TCO Certified 39 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 40 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Symbols/Numerics 35, 36 Federal Communications Commission notices notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 35, 36 notebook computers notice 1 Index A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 21 B battery 15 battery notice 8, 9, 23 battery recycling 23 Belarus regulatory notice 3 Brazil notice 3, 17 C cable grounding notice 22 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 26 China PC energy label 26 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 29, 31 D disposal notices battery 23 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 23 factory sealed battery 9 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 23 ENERGY STAR certification 24 environmental notices 23 equipment disposal notice 23 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 37 F fan notice 16 G GS Notice 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 16 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 37 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 37 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9, 16 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 10 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 10, 11 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 12 airline travel 8 battery 8, 9, 15, 23 Belarus regulatory 3 Brazil 3, 17 Canada 3 China restriction of hazardous substances 29, 31 environmental 23 equipment disposal 23 ergonomics 5 fan 16 headset and earphone volume level 16 India restriction of hazardous substances 37 Japan 6 Japan power cord 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 37 laser safety 9, 16 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 10 perchlorate material 25 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 8 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 20 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 23 S Singapore wireless notice 7 Index 41 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 8 TCO Certified Certification 39 TCO Certified Edge Certification 40 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 20 tropical warning notice 21 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 22 U U.S. modem statement 10, 11 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 16 W wireless LAN devices 2 42 Index
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.65 MiB | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 |
FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Version1.0.2 Date2018-07-28 Copyright Copyright 2018 Fibocom Wireless Inc. All rights reserved. Without the prior written permission of the copyright holder, any company or individual is prohibited to excerpt, copy any part of or the entire document, or distribute the document in any form. Notice changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End user must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The document is subject to update from time to time owing to the product version upgrade or other reasons. Unless otherwise specified, the document only serves as the user guide. All the statements, information and suggestions contained in the document do not constitute any explicit or implicit guarantee. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 2 of 55 This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:
1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and the Max allowed antenna gain is as following table showed:
Operating Band Antenna GaindBi WCDMA BAND II WCDMA BAND IV WCDMA BAND V LTE BAND 2 LTE BAND 4 LTE BAND 5 LTE BAND 7 LTE BAND 12 LTE BAND 13 LTE BAND 14 LTE BAND 17 LTE BAND 25 LTE BAND 26814-824 LTE BAND 26824-849 LTE BAND 30 LTE BAND 38 LTE BAND 41 LTE BAND 66 8.5 5.5 9.07 9 6 9.41 9 8.85 10.31 10.38 9.74 9 8.51 8.56 1 9 5.5 6 2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed Host manufacturer is responsible for ensuring that the host continues to be compliant with the Part 15 subpart B unintentional radiator requirements after the module is installed and operational. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 3 of 55 The document is subject to update from time to time owing to the product version upgrade or other reasons. Unless otherwise specified, the document only serves as the user guide. All the statements, information and suggestions contained in the document do not constitute any explicit or implicit guarantee. IMPORTANT NOTE: In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the FCC authorization is no longer considered valid and the FCC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate FCC authorization. End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains FCC ID: ZMOL860GL. The grantee's FCC ID can be used only when all FCC compliance requirements are met. Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 4 of 55 This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareilne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.\
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. The Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada certification label of a module shall be clearly visible at all times when installed in the host device; otherwise, the host device must be labeled to display the Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada certification number for the module, preceded by the words Contains transmitter module IC: 21374-L860GL L'tiquette de certification Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada d'un module doit tre clairement visible en tout temps lorsqu'elle est installe dans le dispositif hte. sinon, le priphrique hte doit tre tiquet pour afficher le numro de certification Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada du module, prcd des mots "Contient le module metteur IC: 21374-L860GL. The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and the Max allowed antenna gain is as following table showed Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 5 of 55 L'antenne doit tre installe de telle sorte que 20 cm soient maintenus entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs, et le gain d'antenne maximal autoris est indiqu dans le tableau suivant. Operating Band/
Bande d'opration WCDMA BAND II WCDMA BAND IV WCDMA BAND V LTE BAND 2 LTE BAND 4 LTE BAND 5 LTE BAND 7 LTE BAND 12 LTE BAND 13 LTE BAND 14 LTE BAND 17 LTE BAND 25 LTE BAND 26 824-849 LTE BAND 30 LTE BAND 38 LTE BAND 41 LTE BAND 66 Max allowed Gain/
Max autoris Gain
(dBi) 8.50 5.50 8.76 9.00 6.00 8.25 9.00 8.76 9.09 9.13 8.79 9.00 8.25 1.00 9.00 5.50 6.00 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 6 of 55 Trademark The trademark is registered and owned by Fibocom Wireless Inc. Version Record Version Update date Remark V1.0.0 2018-01-25 Draft version V1.0.1 2018-03-09 1. Add UL CA combinations description. 2. Modify pin definition and description. V1.0.2 2018-07-19 1. Modify module timing 2. Change tray package type 3. Modify CA Combinations 4. And add RF performance parameters and power consumption V1.0.3 2018-07-28 1. Modify B41 HPUE maximum TX power description 2. Delete Band21/Band32 Related Information Applicability Table No. Product model Description 1 L860-GL-01 NA Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 7 of 55 Contents 1 Foreword .................................................................................................................................................. 11 1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 11 1.2 Reference Standard ....................................................................................................................... 11 1.3 Related Documents ....................................................................................................................... 11 2 Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 12 2.2 Specification .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.3 CA combinations ........................................................................................................................... 13 2.4 Application Framework.................................................................................................................. 15 2.5 Hardware Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 15 2.6 Antenna Configuration .................................................................................................................. 16 3 Application Interface ................................................................................................................................ 17 3.1 M.2 Interface ................................................................................................................................. 17 3.1.1 Pin Map ............................................................................................................................... 17 3.1.2 Pin Definition ....................................................................................................................... 18 3.2 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................ 22 3.2.1 Power Supply ...................................................................................................................... 22 3.2.2 Logic level ........................................................................................................................... 24 3.2.3 Power Consumption ........................................................................................................... 24 3.3 Control Signal ............................................................................................................................... 26 3.3.1 Module Start-Up.................................................................................................................. 27 3.3.1.1 Start-up Circuit ......................................................................................................... 27 3.3.1.2 Start-up Timing Sequence ........................................................................................ 27 3.3.2 Module Shutdown ............................................................................................................... 28 3.3.3 Module Reset ...................................................................................................................... 28 3.3.4 PCIe Reset ......................................................................................................................... 30 3.4 PCIe & USB .................................................................................................................................. 31 3.4.1 PCIe Interface ..................................................................................................................... 31 3.4.1.1 PCIe Interface Definition .......................................................................................... 31 3.4.1.2 PCIe Interface Application ........................................................................................ 32 3.4.2 USB Interface ..................................................................................................................... 34 3.4.2.1 USB Interface Definition ........................................................................................... 34 3.4.2.2 USB2.0 Interface Application ................................................................................... 34 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 8 of 55 3.5 USIM Interface .............................................................................................................................. 35 3.5.1 USIM1 Pins ......................................................................................................................... 35 3.5.2 USIM2 Pins ......................................................................................................................... 35 3.5.3 USIM Interface Circuit ........................................................................................................ 36 3.5.3.1 N.C. SIM Card Slot ................................................................................................... 36 3.5.3.2 N.O. SIM Card Slot ................................................................................................... 36 3.5.4 USIM Hot-Plugging ............................................................................................................. 37 3.5.5 USIM Design ....................................................................................................................... 38 3.6 Status Indicator ............................................................................................................................. 38 3.6.1 LED#1 Signal ...................................................................................................................... 38 3.7 Interrupt Control ............................................................................................................................ 39 3.7.1 W_DISABLE1# ................................................................................................................... 39 3.7.2 BODYSAR .......................................................................................................................... 40 3.7.3 ANT_CONFIG ..................................................................................................................... 40 3.8 ANT Tunable Interface .................................................................................................................. 40 3.9 Configuration Interface ................................................................................................................. 41 3.10 Other Interfaces .......................................................................................................................... 42 4 Radio Frequency ..................................................................................................................................... 42 4.1 RF Interface .................................................................................................................................. 42 4.1.1 RF Interface Functionality................................................................................................... 42 4.1.2 RF Connector Characteristic .............................................................................................. 42 4.1.3 RF Connector Dimension ................................................................................................... 42 4.2 Operating Band ............................................................................................................................. 44 4.3 Transmitting Power ....................................................................................................................... 45 4.4 Receiver Sensitivity ....................................................................................................................... 46 4.4.1 Dual Antenna Receiver Sensitivity ..................................................................................... 46 4.4.2 Four Antenna Receiver Sensitivity ..................................................................................... 47 4.5 GNSS ............................................................................................................................................ 48 4.6 Antenna Design ............................................................................................................................. 49 5 Structure Specification ............................................................................................................................ 51 5.1 Dimension of Structure ................................................................................................................. 51 5.2 M.2 Interface Model ...................................................................................................................... 51 5.3 M.2 Connector .............................................................................................................................. 52 5.4 Storage .......................................................................................................................................... 53 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 9 of 55 5.4.1 Storage Life ........................................................................................................................ 53 5.5 Packing ......................................................................................................................................... 53 5.5.1 Tray Package ...................................................................................................................... 53 5.5.2 Tray size ............................................................................................................................. 55 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 10 of 55 1 Foreword 1.1 Introduction The document describes the electrical characteristics, RF performance, dimensions and application environment, etc. of L860-GL (hereinafter referred to as L860). With the assistance of the document and other instructions, the developers can quickly understand the hardware functions of L860 modules and develop products. 1.2 Reference Standard The design of the product complies with the following standards:
3GPP TS 34.121-1 V8.11.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception (FDD);Part 1: Conformance specification 3GPP TS 34.122 V11.13.0: Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio transmission and reception (TDD) 3GPP TS 36.521-1 V13.4.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Conformance testing 3GPP TS 21.111 V10.0.0: USIM and IC card requirements 3GPP TS 51.011 V4.15.0: Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module -Mobile Equipment
(SIM-ME) interface 3GPP TS 31.102 V10.11.0: Characteristics of the Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) application 3GPP TS 31.11 V10.16.0: Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) Application Toolkit(USAT) 3GPP TS 36.124 V10.3.0: Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for mobile terminals and ancillary equipment 3GPP TS 27.007 V10.0.8: AT command set for User Equipment (UE) 3GPP TS 27.005 V10.0.1: Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTE - DCE) interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service
(CBS) PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.1 1.3 Related Documents RF Antenna Application Design Specification L8-Family System Driver Integration and Application Guidance L8-Family AT Commands Manual Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 11 of 55 2 Overview 2.1 Introduction L860 is a highly integrated 4G WWAN module which uses M.2 form factor interface. It supports LTE FDD/LTE TDD/WCDMA systems and can be applied to most cellular networks of mobile carrier in the world. 2.2 Specification Specification LTE FDD: Band 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 66 LTE TDD: Band 38, 39, 40, 41 Operating Band LAA Band 46 Receiver only WCDMA/HSPA+: Band 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 GNSS/Beidou: support LTE 1 Gbps DL/75 Mbps UL(Cat 16) Data Transmission UMTS/HSPA+
Carrier aggregation 5CA Downlink UMTS:384 kbps DL/384 kbps UL DC-HSPA+:42 Mbps DL(Cat 24)//11.52 Mbps UL(Cat7) Power Supply DC 3.135V4..4V, Typical 3.3V Normal operating temperature: -10C +55C Temperature Extended operating temperature: -20C +65C Storage temperature: -40C +85C Interface: M.2 Key-B Dimension30 x 42 x 2.3mm Weight: About 6.2 g Physical characteristics Interface Antenna WWAN Antenna x 4 Connector Support 4x4 MIMO Function Interface Dual SIM, 3V/1.8V PCIe 2.0 X1 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 12 of 55 Specification USB 2.0 USB 3.0(Reserved) W_Disable#
Body Sar LED Tunable antenna I2S(Reserved) Software Protocol Stack IPV4/IPV6 AT commands 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005 Firmware update PCIe Multiple carrier Windows MBIM support Windows update AGNSS Other feature Note:
When temperature goes beyond normal operating temperature range of -10C~+55C, RF performance of module may be slightly off 3GPP specifications. For normal operating temperature, LTE FDD Band 4 and 13 can support temperature ranging from -20 to +60. 2.3 CA combinations DL CA Combinations 2CA Inter-band 1+3, 5, 7, 8, 18, 19, 20, 26, 28, 38, 41, 46 2+4, 5, 12, 13, 14, 29, 30, 46, 66 3+5, 7, 8, 19, 20, 28, 38, 40, 41, 46 4+5, 12, 13, 29, 30, 46 5+7, 30, 46, 66 7+8, 20, 28, 32, 46 12+30, 66 13+46, 66 14+30, 66 25+26, 41, 46 26+41 29+30, 66 30+66 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 13 of 55 DL CA Combinations Intra-band(non-contiguous) Intra-band(contiguous) 41+46 46+66 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 25, 41, 66 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 40, 41, 66 Inter-band 3CA 2 intra-band(non-contiguous) plus inter-band 2 intra-band(contiguous) plus inter-band Intra-band(non-contiguous) Intra-band(contiguous) Inter-band 1+3+5, 1+3+7, 1+3+8, 1+3+19, 1+3+20, 1+3+28, 1+3+38, 1+5+7, 1+7+8, 1+7+20, 1+7+28 2+4+5, 2+4+12, 2+4+13, 2+5+30, 2+12+30, 2+29+30, 2+5+66, 2+13+66, 2+14+30, 2+14+66, 2+30+66, 2+5+46, 2+13+46, 2+46+66, 2+12+66 3+5+7, 3+7+8, 3+7+20, 3+7+28 4+5+30, 4+12+30, 4+29+30 5+30+66, 5+46+66 12+30+66, 13+46+66, 14+30+66, 29+30+66 2+2+5, 2+2+12, 2+2+13, 2+2+30, 2+2+66, 2+4+4, 2+46+46, 2+66+66 3+7+7, 4+4+5, 4+4+12, 4+4+13, 4+46+46, 5+66+66 12+66+66, 13+66+66, 46+46+66, 29+66+66, 30+66+66 1+3+3, 1+7+7, 1+40+40*, 1+41+41*
2+5+5*, 2+46+46, 2+66+66 3+3+5*, 3+3+7, 3+3+20, 3+3+28*, 3+7+7, 3+40+40, 3+41+41*, 3+3+41 4+46+46, 5+5+30*, 5+5+66, 5+46+46*, 5+66+66, 7+7+28*
13+46+46*, 13+66+66, 25+41+41*, 26+41+41*, 28+40+40*,46+46+66 41, 66 40*, 41*
1+3+5+7, 1+3+7+8, 1+3+7+20, 1+3+7+28 2+5+30+66, 2+12+30+66, 2+14+30+66 2 intra-band(non-contiguous) plus 2 inter-band 2+2+5+66, 2+2+12+30, 2+2+12+66, 2+2+13+66, 2+5+66+66, 2+12+66+66, 2+13+66+66, 5+30+66+66, 29+30+66+66*
2 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 inter-band 4CA 1+3+3+5*, 1+3+3+7, 1+3+3+20*, 1+3+7+7, 1+7+7+28*, 1+3+40+40*, 2+5+5+30*, 2+5+5+66*, 2+5+46+46*, 2+13+46+46*, 2+46+46+46*, 2+46+46+66, 2+5+66+66, 2+13+66+66 3+3+7+20*, 3+3+7+28*, 3+7+7+28*, 3+28+40+40*, 4+46+46+46*, 5+5+30+66*, 5+46+46+66*, 13+46+46+66*, 66+46+46+46*
2 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 intra-band(contiguous) 2 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 intra-band(non-contiguous) 3+3+7+7 5+5+66+66 3 intra-band(contiguous) plus inter-band 2+46+46+46, 3+40+40+40, 4+46+46+46, 5+46+46+46, 13+46+46+46, 25+41+41+41, 28+40+40+40, 66+46+46+46 Intra-band(non-contiguous) Intra-band(contiguous) 2 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 intra-band(contiguous) plus inter-
band 2 intra-band(contiguous) plus 3 inter-band 5CA 41 40*
1+3+3+7+7, 3+3+7+7+28*, 2+46+46+46+46*, 46+46+46+46+66*
1+3+3+7+20*, 1+3+7+7+28*, 2+5+5+30+66*
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 14 of 55 DL CA Combinations 2 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 intra-band(non-contiguous) plus inter-band 2+5+5+66+66*
3 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 intra-band(non-contiguous) 2+2+46+46+46*
3 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 inter-band 2+5+46+46+46*, 2+13+46+46+46*, 2+46+46+46+46*, 2+46+46+46+66*, 3+28+40+40+40*, 4+46+46+46+46*, 5+46+46+46+66*, 13+46+46+46+66*, 46+46+46+46+66*
3 intra-band(contiguous) plus 2 intra-band(non-contiguous) 46+46+46+66+66*
4 intra-band(contiguous) plus inter-band 2+46+46+46+46*, 3+40+40+40+40*, 5+46+46+46+46*, 13+46+46+46+46*, 46+46+46+46+66*
Intra-band(non-contiguous) 41*
Note:
* Those CA are not defined in 3GPP as of publication date, they are not fully applicable for SAR test,support pending 3GPP approval. 2.4 Application Framework The peripheral applications for L860 module are shown in Figure 2-1:
Figure2-1 Application Framework 2.5 Hardware Block Diagram The hardware block diagram in Figure 2-2 shows the main hardware functions of L860 module, including base band and RF functions. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 15 of 55 ModuleSIM1USB2.0Power SupplyON/OFF# RESET#ControlEINTIndicatorHost applicationD/G(AUX1) ANTMain ANTSIM CardPCIeSIM2SIM CardM2(AUX3) ANTM1(AUX2) ANT Baseband contains the followings:
GSM/UMTS/LTE FDD controller/Power supply NAND/internal LPDDR4 RAM Application interface RF contains the followings:
RF Transceiver RF Power/PA RF Front end RF Filter Antenna Connector Figure 2-2 Hardware Block Diagram 2.6 Antenna Configuration L860 module support four antennas and the configuration is as below table:
Antenna Connector Function Description Band configuration M M1 M2 D/G Main ANT All supported bands transmit & receive MIMO1 ANT 4x4 MIMO supported bands receive MIMO2 ANT 4x4 MIMO supported bands receive Diversity & GNSS ANT All supported bands and GNSS receive Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 16 of 55 3 Application Interface 3.1 M.2 Interface The L860 module applies standard M.2 Key-B interface, with a total of 75 pins. 3.1.1 Pin Map Figure 3-1 Pin Map Note:
Pin Notch represents the gap of the gold fingers. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 17 of 55 3.1.2 Pin Definition The pin definition is as follows:
Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Type 1 CONFIG_3 O NC the WWAN PCIe, USB3.0 interface NC, L860 M.2 module is configured as 2 3 4 5 6 7
+3.3V GND
+3.3V GND FULL_CARD_ POWER_OFF#
PI
-
PI
-
I
-
-
-
-
PU USB D+
I/O type Power input GND Power input GND Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power enable, Module power on input, CMOS internal pull up USB Data Plus 8 W_DISABLE1#
I PD WWAN Disable, active low 9 USB D-
I/O USB Data Minus 10 LED1#
OD T 11 GND
-
-
12 Notch 13 Notch 14 Notch 15 Notch 16 Notch 17 Notch 18 Notch 19 Notch System status LED, Output open drain, CMOS 3.3V GND Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch 3.3/1.8V 0.3---3V CMOS 3.3/1.8V 0.3---3V CMOS 3.3V Power Supply 20 I2S_CLK O PD I2S Serial clock, Reserved CMOS 1.8V 21 CONFIG_0 NC the WWAN PCIe, USB3.0 interface NC, L860 M.2 module is configured as 22 I2S_RX I PD type I2S Serial receive data, Reserved CMOS 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 18 of 55 Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Type 23 WOWWAN#
24 I2S_TX 25 DPR 26 W_DISABLE2#
27 GND 28 I2S_WA 29 USB3.0_TX-
30 UIM_RESET 31 USB3.0_TX+
32 UIM_CLK 33 GND O O I I
-
O O O O O
-
PD PD PD PD
-
PD L L
-
Wake up host, Reserved CMOS 1.8V I2S Serial transmit data, Reserved CMOS 1.8V Body SAR Detect, active low GNSS disable, active low, Reserved CMOS 3.3/1.8V CMOS 3.3/1.8V GND Power Supply I2S Word alignment/select, Reserved CMOS 1.8V USB3.0 Transmit data minus, Reserved SIM reset signal 1.8V/3V USB3.0 Transmit data plus, Reserved SIM clock Signal 1.8V/3V GND Power Supply 34 UIM_DATA I/O L SIM data input/output 1.8V/3V 35 USB3.0_RX-
36 UIM_PWR 37 USB3.0_RX+
38 NC 39 GND 40 SIM2_DETECT I O I
-
I
-
PD USB3.0 receive data minus, Reserved SIM power supply, 3V/1.8V 1.8V/3V USB3.0 receive data plus, Reserved NC GND SIM2 Detect, internal pull up(390K), active high Power Supply CMOS 1.8V 41 PETn0 O PCIe TX Differential signals Negative 42 UIM2_DATA I/O L SIM2 data input/output 1.8V/3V 43 PETp0 44 UIM2_CLK 45 GND 46 UIM2_RESET 47 PERn0 48 UIM2_PWR O O
-
O I O L
-
L PCIe TX Differential signals Positive SIM2 clock Signal 1.8V/3V GND Power Supply SIM2 reset signal 1.8V/3V PCIe RX Differential signals Negative SIM2 power supply, 3V/1.8V 1.8V/3V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 19 of 55 Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Type 49 PERp0 50 PERST#
I I PCIe RX Differential signals Positive Asserted to reset module PCIe interface default. If module went into PU core dump, it will reset whole module, CMOS 3.3V not only PCIe interface. Active low, internal pull up(10K) 51 GND
-
-
GND Power Supply 52 CLKREQ#
O PU also used by L1 PM Sub states CMOS 3.3V Asserted by device to request a PCIe reference clock be available (active clock state) in order to transmit data. It 53 REFCLKN I 54 PEWAKE#
O L mechanism, asserted by either host or device to initiate an L1 exit. Active low, internal pull up(10K) PCIe Reference Clock signal Negative Asserted to wake up system and reactivate PCIe link from L2 to L0, it depends on system whether supports wake up functionality. Active low, open drain output and should add external pull up on platform CMOS 3.3V 55 REFCLKP I PCIe Reference Clock signal Positive 56 RFFE_SCLK O PD MIPI Interface Tunable ANT, RFFE clock 57 GND GND 58 RFFE_SDATA I/O PD MIPI Interface Tunable ANT, RFFE data CMOS 1.8V Power Supply CMOS 1.8V 59 ANTCTL0 O L Tunable ANT CTRL0 CMOS 1.8V 60 COEX3 I/O PD Wireless Coexistence between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, based on BT-SIG coexistence protocol. COEX_EXT_FTA, CMOS 1.8V Reserved 61 ANTCTL1 O PD Tunable ANT CTRL1 CMOS 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 20 of 55 Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Type 62 COEX_RXD I T Wireless Coexistence between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, based on BT-SIG coexistence protocol. UART receive signal(WWAN module side), Reserved CMOS 1.8V 63 ANTCTL2 O PD Tunable ANT CTRL2 CMOS 1.8V 64 COEX_TXD O T Wireless Coexistence between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, based on BT-SIG coexistence protocol. UART transmit signal(WWAN module side), Reserved CMOS 1.8V 65 ANTCTL3 O PD Tunable ANT CTRL3 CMOS 1.8V 66 SIM1_DETECT I PD 67 RESET#
I PU SIM1 Detect, internal pull up(390K), active high WWAN reset input, internal pull up(10K), active low Host antenna configuration detect, CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V 68 ANT_CONFIG I PD internal pull up(100K), CMOS 1.8V 69 CONFIG_1 O GND as the WWAN PCIe, USB3.0 Reserved GND, L860 M.2 module is configured 70
+3.3V 71 GND 72
+3.3V 73 GND 74
+3.3V PI
-
PI
-
PI
-
-
-
-
-
interface type Power input GND Power input GND Power input Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply 75 CONFIG_2 O NC the WWAN PCIe, USB3.0 interface NC, L860 M.2 module is configured as type Reset Value: The initial status after module reset, not the status when working. H: High Voltage Level L: Low Voltage Level PD: Pull-Down PU: Pull-Up T: Tristate Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 21 of 55 OD: Open Drain PI: Power Input PO: Power Output Note:
The unused pins can be left floating. 3.2 Power Supply The power interface of L860 module as shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Description DC ParameterV Minimum Typical Maximum Value Value Value 2, 4, 70, 72, 74 +3.3V PI Power supply input 3.135 3.3 4.4 36 48 UIM_PWR PO USIM power supply UIM2_PWR PO USIM power supply
-
-
1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V
-
-
L860 module uses PCIe interface, according to the PCIe specification, the PCIe Vmain should be used as the +3.3V power source, not the Vaux. The Vaux is the PCIe backup power source and it is not sufficient as the power supply. In addition, the DC/DC power supply other than PCIe ports should not be used as the external power cannot control the module status through the PCIe protocol. 3.2.1 Power Supply The L860 module should be powered through the +3.3V pins, and the power supply design is shown in Figure 3-2:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 22 of 55 The filter capacitor design for power supply as shown in the following table:
Figure 3-2 Power Supply Design Recommended capacitance Application Description Reduce power fluctuations of the module in operation, requiring capacitors with low ESR. LDO or DC/DC power supply requires the capacitor of no less than 440uF The capacitor for battery power supply can be reduced to 100~200uF Filter out the interference generated from the clock and digital signals Filter out low frequency band RF interference 220uF x 2 Voltage-stabilizing capacitors 1uF, 100nF Digital signal noise 700/800, 850/900 MHz frequency band 1500/1700/1800/1900, 39pF, 33pF 18pF, 10pF, 8.2pF, 6.8pF, 3.3pF 2100/2300, 2500/2600MHz, Filter out medium/high frequency band RF 3500/3700MHz, 5GHz frequency interference band The stable power supply can ensure the normal operation of L860 module; and the ripple of the power supply should be less than 300mV in design. Because module support 5CA download, when module operates with the maximum data transfer throughput, the maximum operating current can reach to upper 2500mA. It requests the power source voltage should not be lower than 3.135V, otherwise module may shut down or restart. The power supply requirement is shown in Figure 3-3:
Figure 3-3 Power Supply Requirement Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 23 of 55 Burst transmitBurst transmitmin:3.135VPower supplyRipple300mVDrop VBAT3.135V 3.2.2 Logic level The L860 module 1.8V logic level definition as shown in the following table:
Parameters Minimum Typical Maximum Unit 1.8V logic level VIH VIL 1.71 1.3
-0.3 1.8 1.8 0 1.89 1.89 0.3 V V V The L860 module 3.3V logic level definition as shown in the following table:
Parameters Minimum Typical Maximum Unit 3.3V logic level VIH VIL 3.135 2.3
-0.3 3.3 3.3 0 3.465 3.465 0.3 V V V 3.2.3 Power Consumption In the condition of 3.3V power supply, the L860 power consumption as shown in the following table:
Parameter Mode Condition Average Current(mA) Ioff Power off Power supply, module power off DRX=6 WCDMA DRX=8 DRX=9 ISleep LTE FDD Paging cycle #64 frames (0.64 sec DRx cycle) LTE TDD Paging cycle #64 frames (0.64 sec DRx cycle) Radio Off AT+CFUN=4, Flight mode WCDMA Data call Band 1 @+23.5dBm WCDMA Data call Band 2 @+23.5dBm IWCDMA-RMS WCDMA WCDMA Data call Band 4 @+23.5dBm WCDMA Data call Band 5 @+23.5dBm WCDMA Data call Band 8 @+23.5dBm 0.08 13 11.5 11 13 13 10 665 625 825 570 565 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 24 of 55 Parameter Mode Condition LTE FDD Data call Band 1 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 2 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 3 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 4 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 5 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 7 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 8 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 12 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 13 @+23dBm LTE FDD LTE FDD Data call Band 14 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 17 @+23dBm ILTE-RMS LTE FDD Data call Band 18 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 19 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 20 @+23dBm Average Current(mA) 840 970 785 890 700 890 725 610 750 750 625 690 700 635 LTE FDD Data call Band 25 @+23dBm 1240 LTE FDD Data call Band 26 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 28 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 30 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data call Band 66 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data call Band 38 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data call Band 39 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data call Band 40 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data call Band 41 @+23dBm LTE TDD 700 680 780 915 620 450 770 690 In 5CA mode, the L860 power consumption as shown in the following table:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 25 of 55 5CA Combination 1+3+3+7+7, 3+3+7+7+28, 2+46+46+46+46, Condition Average
(LTE FDD 5CA, Full RB) Current(mA) Band 1 @+22dBm Band 2 @+22dBm
<2500mA
<2500mA 46+46+46+46+66 Band 3 @+22dBm
<2500mA 1+3+3+7+20, 1+3+7+7+28, 2+5+5+30+66 2+5+5+66+66, 2+2+46+46+46 2+5+46+46+46, 2+13+46+46+46, 2+46+46+46+46, 2+46+46+46+66, Band 5 @+22dBm Band 7 @+22dBm Band 13 @+22dBm 3+28+40+40+40, 4+46+46+46+46, Band 20 @+22dBm 5+46+46+46+66, 13+46+46+46+66, 46+46+46+66+66 2+46+46+46+46, 3+40+40+40+40, 5+46+46+46+46, 13+46+46+46+46, 41+41+41+41+41 Note Band 28 @+22dBm Band 30 @+22dBm Band 40 @+22dBm Band 41 @+22dBm Band 66 @+22dBm The data above is an average value obtained by testing some samples. 3.3 Control Signal
<2500mA
<2500mA
<2500mA
<2500mA
<2500mA
<2500mA
<2500mA
<2500mA
<2500mA The L860 module provides two control signals for power on/off and reset operations, the pin defined as shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Functions Type 6 FULL_CARD_POWER _OFF#
67 RESET#
50 PERST#
I I I PU PU Module power on/off input, internal pull up Power on: High/Floating Power off: Low 3.3/1.8V WWAN reset input, internal pull up(10K), active low 1.8V Asserted to reset module PCIe interface default. If module went into PU core dump, it will reset whole module, not only PCIe interface. Active low, internal pull up(10K) CMOS 3.3V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 26 of 55 Note RESET# and PERST# need to be controlled by independent GPIO, and not shared with other devices on the host. 3.3.1 Module Start-Up 3.3.1.1 Start-up Circuit The FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF# pin needs an external 3.3V or 1.8V pull up for booting up. AP
(Application Processor) controls the module start-upthe circuit design is shown in Figure3-4:
Figure 3-4 Circuit for Module Start-up Controlled by AP 3.3.1.2 Start-up Timing Sequence When power supply is ready, the PMU of module will power on and start initialization process by pulling high FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF# signal. After about 10s, module will complete initialization process. The start-up timing is shown in Figure 3-5:
Figure 3-5 Timing Control for Start-up Index Minimum Typical Notes tpr 0ms
-
The delay time of power supply rising from 0V up to 3.135V. If power supply always ready, it can be ignored ton1 100ms 200ms If the RESET# has a residual voltage, then 100ms is necessary Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 27 of 55
+3.3VPERST#tprRESET#ton1Module StateInitializationActivation(AT Command Ready)FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF#ton2typical 10sOFF Index Minimum Typical Notes ton2 100ms 400ms PERST# should de-asserted after FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF#
3.3.2 Module Shutdown Module can be shut down by following control:
Shutdown Control Action Condition Software Sending AT+CFUN=0 command Normal shutdown(recommend) Hardware Pull down Only used when a hardware exception occurs and the software control cannot be FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF# pin used. Module can be shut down by sending AT+CFUN=0 command. When the module receives the software shutdown command, the module will start the finalization process (the reverse process of initialization), and it will be completed after tsd time(tsd is the time which AP receive OK of AT+CFUN=0, if there is no response, the max tsd is 5s). In the finalization process, the module will save the network, SIM card and some other parameters from memory, then clear the memory and shut down PMU. The software control timing is shown in Figure 3-6:
Figure 3-6 Software control power off timing Index Minimum Typical Maxim Notes tpd 10ms 100ms
-
+3.3V power supply goes down time. If power supply is always on, it can be ignored toff1 10ms 30ms
-
RESET# should asserted before FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF#
toff2 0ms 30ms toff1 PERST# should asserted after RESET#
3.3.3 Module Reset The L860 module can reset to its initial status by pulling down the RESET# signal for more than 10ms Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 28 of 55
+3.3VPERST#tpdRESET#Module StateFinalizationActivationFULL_CARD_POWER_OFF#toff2tsdOFFAT+CFUN=0toff1
(30msis recommended), and module will restart after RESET# signal is released. When customer executes RESET# function, the PMU remains its power inside the module. The recommended circuit design is shown in the Figure 3-7:
There are two reset control timings as below:
Figure 3-7 Recommended Design for Reset Circuit Host may keep FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF# high when system restarting, module reset timing is shown in the Figure 3-8;
Host may assert FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF# high when system restarting, module reset timing is shown in the Figure 3-9;
Figure 3-8 Reset control timing1st Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 29 of 55
+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateRestartActivationFULL_CARD_POWER_OFF#typical 10sPMU RESETActivationtres1tres2 Figure 3-9 Reset control timing2nd Index Minimum Typical Notes tres1 10ms 30ms RESET# should asserted time tres2 0ms 30ms PERST# is not required for modem restart, thus this pin can be PERST# should asserted after RESET#. remains high during restart Note:
RESET# is a sensitive signal, its recommended to add a filter capacitor close to the module. In case of PCB layout, the RESET# signal lines should keep away from the RF interference and protected by GND. Also, the RESET# signal lines shall neither near the PCB edge nor route on the surface planes to avoid module from reset caused by ESD problems. 3.3.4 PCIe Reset Module supports PCIe goes in to D3cold L2 state in Win10 system. The D0->D3cold L2@S0/S0ix/S3
->D0 timing is shown in figure 3-10:
Figure 3-10 PCIe reset timing Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 30 of 55
+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateRestartActivationFULL_CARD_POWER_OFF#typical 10sPMU RESETActivationtres1tres1tres2+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateD3cold L2@S0/S0ix/S3D0FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF#D0 3.4 PCIe & USB L860 module supports PCIe and USB interface for data request. PCIe & USB interface functions are as below table:
Interface System Priority Description PCIe Win10 High If PCIe and USB ports connected both with PC, module will initial Priority: PCIe>USB. PCIe first, then disable USB port It must disconnect PCIe port, only keep USB connecting. USB Android/Linux Low If keep PCIe and USB connecting both, it needs disable PCIe by BIOS/UEFI of PC 3.4.1 PCIe Interface L860 module supports PCIe Gen2, one lane for data transmission channel.it is also compatible with PCIe Gen1.After L860 module is inserted into PC, PCIe interface can work with the driver, then map a MBIM port and a GNSS port in Win10 system. While MBIM interface is used for initiating data service in Win10 system and GNSS interface for receiving GNSS data. 3.4.1.1 PCIe Interface Definition Pin# Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description Type 41 PETn0 O
-
43 PETP0 O
-
47 PERn0 I
-
49 PERP0 I
-
53 REFCLKN I
-
55 REFCLKP I
-
PCIe TX Differential signals Negative PCIe TX Differential signals Positive PCIe RX Differential signals NegativeBit0 PCIe RX Differential signals Positive PCIe Reference Clock signal Negative PCIe Reference Clock signal Positive
-
-
-
-
-
-
50 PERST#
I PU default. If module went into coredump, it will CMOS 3.3V Asserted to reset module PCIe interface reset whole module, not only PCIe interface. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 31 of 55 Pin# Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description Type 52 CLKREQ# O L Active low, internal pull up(10K) Asserted by device to request a PCIe reference clock be available (active clock state) in order to transmit data. It also used by L1 PM Sub states mechanism, asserted by either host or device to initiate an L1 exit. Active low, internal pull up(10K) Asserted to wake up system and reactivate PCIe link from L2 to L0, it depends on system CMOS 3.3V 54 PEWAKE# O L whether supports wake up functionality. CMOS 3.3V Active low, open drain output and should add external pull up on platform 3.4.1.2 PCIe Interface Application The reference circuit is shown in Figure 3-11:
Figure 3-11 Reference Circuit for PCIe Interface L860 module supports PCIe Gen2 interface, including three difference pairs: transmit pair TXP/N, receiving pair RXP/N and clock pair CLKP/N. PCIe can achieve the maximum transmission rate of 5 GT/s, and must strictly follow the rules below in PCB Layout:
The differential signal pair lines shall be parallel and equal in length;
The differential signal pair lines shall be short if possible and be controlled within 15 inch(380 mm) for AP end;
The impedance of differential signal pair lines is recommended to be 100 ohm, and can be controlled to 80120 ohm in accordance with PCIe protocol;
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 32 of 55 Module sideM.2 Key-B 75pin ConnectorAP sideAC CapsAC CapsPERST#CLKREQ#WAKE#PERST#(pin50)CLKREQ#(pin52)PEWAKE#(pin54)PERn0PERP0PETn0PETP0REFCLKNREFCLKPPETn0(pin41)PETP0(pin43)PERn0(pin47)PERP0(pin49)REFCLKN(pin53)REFCLKP(pin55)+3.3V10K It shall avoid the discontinuous reference ground, such as segment and space;
When the differential signal lines go through different layers, the via hole of grounding signal should be in close to that of signal, and generally, each pair of signals require 1-3 grounding signal via holes and the lines shall never cross the segment of plane;
Try to avoid bended lines and avoid introducing common-mode noise in the system, which will influence the signal integrity and EMI of difference pair. As shown in Figure 3-12, the bending angle of all lines should be equal or greater than 135, the spacing between difference pair lines should be larger than 20mil, and the line caused by bending should be greater than 1.5 times line width at least. When a serpentine line is used for length match with another line, the bended length of each segment shall be at least 3 times the line width (3W). The largest spacing between the bended part of the serpentine line and another one of the differential lines must be less than 2 times the spacing of normal differential lines (S1<2S);
Figure 3-12 Requirement of PCIe Line The difference in length of two data lines in difference pair should be within 5mil, and the length match is required for all parts. When the length match is conducted for the differential lines, the designed position of correct match should be close to that of incorrect match, as shown in Figure 3-
13. However, there is no specific requirements for the length match of transmit pair and receiving pair, that is, the length match is only required in the internal differential lines rather than between different difference pairs. The length match should be close to the signal pin and pass the small-
angle bending design. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 33 of 55 PCIe Difference Pair 1WSS1<2S3W13520milPCIe Difference Pair 21.5W Figure 3-13 Length Match Design of PCIe Difference Pair 3.4.2 USB Interface The L860 module supports USB2.0 which is compatible with USB High-Speed (480 Mbit/s) and USB Full-
Speed (12 Mbit/s).For the USB timing and electrical specification of L860 module, please refer to Universal Serial Bus Specification 2.0. When module inserted PC, USB can enumerate three ACM and three NCM ports in Android/Linux system, the ports can be configured in practical application. 3.4.2.1 USB Interface Definition Pin#
Pin Name I/O Description USB_D+
I/O USB Data Plus USB_D-
I/O USB Data Minus 7 9 3.4.2.2 USB2.0 Interface Application The reference circuit is shown in Figure 3-14:
Type 0.3---3V, USB2.0 0.3---3V, USB2.0 Figure 3-14 Reference Circuit for USB 2.0 Interface Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 34 of 55 Correct matchDismatched endIncorrect matchMatched end Since the module supports USB 2.0 High-Speed, it is required to use TVS diodes with equivalent capacitance of 1pF or smaller ones on the USB_D-/D+ differential signal lines, it is recommended to use 0.5pF TVS diodes. USB_D- and USB_D+ are high speed differential signal lines with the maximum transfer rate of 480 Mbit/s, so the following rules shall be followed carefully in the case of PCB layout:
USB_D- and USB_D+ signal lines should have the differential impedance of 90 ohms. USB_D- and USB_D+ signal lines should be parallel and have the equal length, the right angle routing should be avoided. USB_D- and USB_D+ signal lines should be routed on the layer that is adjacent to the ground layer, and wrapped with GND vertically and horizontally. 3.5 USIM Interface The L860 module has dual built-in USIM card interface, which supports 1.8V and 3V SIM cards. 3.5.1 USIM1 Pins The USIM1 pins description as shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description 36 UIM_PWR 30 UIM_RESET 32 UIM_CLK 34 UIM_DATA PO O O
-
L L I/O L USIM power supply USIM reset USIM clock Type 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V USIM data, internal pull up(4.7K) 1.8V/3V USIM card detect, internal 390K pull-
up. 66 SIM_DETECT I PD Active high, and high level indicates 1.8V SIM card is inserted; and low level indicates SIM card is detached. 3.5.2 USIM2 Pins The USIM2 pins description as shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description 48 UIM2_PWR 46 UIM2_RESET 44 UIM2_CLK PO O O
-
L L USIM2 power supply USIM2 reset USIM2 clock Type 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 35 of 55 Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description Type 42 UIM2_DATA I/O L USIM2 data, internal pull up(4.7K) 1.8V/3V USIM2 card detect, internal 390K pull-up. 40 SIM2_DETECT I PD Active high, and high level indicates 1.8V SIM card is inserted; and low level indicates SIM card is detached. 3.5.3 USIM Interface Circuit 3.5.3.1 N.C. SIM Card Slot The reference circuit design for N.C. (Normally Closed) SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3-15:
The principles of the N.C.SIM card slot are described as follows:
Figure 3-15 Reference Circuit for N.C. SIM Card Slot When the SIM card is detached, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin low. When the SIM card is inserted, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin high. 3.5.3.2 N.O. SIM Card Slot The reference circuit design for N.O. (Normally Open) SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3-16:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 36 of 55 The principles of the N.O.SIM card slot are described as follows:
Figure 3-16 Reference Circuit for N.O. SIM Card Slot When the SIM card is detached, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin low. When the SIM card is inserted, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin high. 3.5.4 USIM Hot-Plugging The L860 module supports the SIM card hot-plugging function, which determines whether the SIM card is inserted or detached by detecting the SIM_DETECT pin state of the SIM card slot. The SIM card hot-plugging function can be configured by AT+MSMPD command, and the description for AT command as shown in the following table:
AT Command Hot-plugging Detection Function Description AT+MSMPD=1 Enable enabled. Default value, the SIM card hot-plugging detection function is The module can detect whether the SIM card is inserted or not through the SIM_DETECT pin state. The SIM card hot-plugging detect function is disabled. AT+MSMPD=0 Disable The module reads the SIM card when starting up, and the SIM_DETECT status will not be detected. After the SIM card hot-plugging detection function is enabled, the module detects that the SIM card is Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 37 of 55 inserted when the SIM_DETECT pin is high, then executes the initialization program and finish the network registration after reading the SIM card information. When the SIM_DETECT pin is low, the module determines that the SIM card is detached and does not read the SIM card. Note:
By default, SIM_DETECT is active-high, which can be switched to active-low by the AT command. Please refer to the AT Commands Manual for the AT command. 3.5.5 USIM Design The SIM card circuit design shall meet the EMC standards and ESD requirements with the improved capability to resist interference, to ensure that the SIM card can work stably. The following guidelines should be noted in case of design:
The SIM card slot placement should near the module as close as possible, and away from the RF antenna, DC/DC power supply, clock signal lines, and other strong interference sources. The SIM card slot with a metal shielding housing can improve the anti-interference ability. The trace length between the SIM card slot and the module should not exceed 100mm, or it could reduce the signal quality. The UIM_CLK and UIM_DATA signal lines should be isolated by GND to avoid crosstalk interference. If it is difficult for the layout, the whole SIM signal lines should be wrapped with GND as a group at least. The filter capacitors and ESD devices for SIM card signals should be placed near to the SIM card slot, and the ESD devices with 22~33pF capacitance should be used. 3.6 Status Indicator The L860 module provides two signals to indicate the operating status of the module, and the status indicator pins as shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Type 10 LED1#
23 WOWWAN#
O O T PD 3.6.1 LED#1 Signal System status LED, drain output. CMOS 3.3V Module wakes up Host (AP)Reserved CMOS 1.8V The LED#1 signal is used to indicate the operating status of the module, and the detailed description as shown in the following table:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 38 of 55 Module Status LED1# Signal RF function ON Low level (LED On) RF function OFF High level (LED Off) The LED driving circuit is shown in figure 3-17:
Figure 3-17 LED Driving Circuit Note:
The resistance of LED current-limiting resistor is selected according to the driving voltage and the driving current. 3.7 Interrupt Control The L860 module provides four interrupt signals, and the pin definition is as follows:
Reset Value PD PD PD PD Pin Pin Name I/O 8 W_DISABLE1#
25 DPR 26 W_DISABLE2#
68 ANT_CONFIG I I I I 3.7.1 W_DISABLE1#
Pin Description Type Enable/Disable RF network CMOS 3.3/1.8V Body SAR detection CMOS 3.3/1.8V GNSS Disable signal Reserved Host antenna configuration detection Reserved CMOS 3.3/1.8V CMOS 1.8V The module provides a hardware pin to enable/disable WWAN RF function, and the function can also be controlled by the AT command. The module enters the Flight mode after the RF function is disabled. The definition of W_DISABLE1# signal is as below table:
W_DISABLE1# signal Function High/Floating WWAN function is enabled, the module exits the Flight mode. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 39 of 55 W_DISABLE1# signal Function Low WWAN function is disabled, the module enters Flight mode. Note The function of W_DISABLE1# can be customized, please refer to the software porting guide. 3.7.2 BODYSAR The L860 module supports Body SAR function by detecting the DPR pin. The voltage level of DPR is high by default, and when the SAR sensor detects the closing human body, the DPR signal will be pulled down. As the result, the module then lowers down its emission power to its default threshold value, thus reducing the RF radiation on the human body. The threshold of emission power can be set by the AT Commands. The definition of DPR signal as shown in the following table:
DPR signal Function High/Floating The module keeps the default emission power Low Lower the maximum emission power to the threshold value of the module. 3.7.3 ANT_CONFIG L860 module can be configured to support dual antennas or 4 antennas by detecting the ANT_CONFIG pin. ANT_CONFIG is an input port which is pulled high internal in default. When ANT_CONFIG is high level, then module supports dual antennas (Main & D/G ANT). When module detects low level of ANT_CONFIG, then module will be configured to support 4 antennas. The definition of ANT_CONFIG signal is shown as below table:
ANT_CONFIG signal Function High/Floating Support dual antennas(Main & D/G ANT)Reserved Low Support 4 antennasReserved 3.8 ANT Tunable Interface The module supports ANT Tunable interfaces with two different control modes, i.e. MIPI interface and 4bit GPO interface. Through cooperating with external antenna adapter switch via ANT Tunable, it can flexibly configure the bands of LTE antenna to improve the antennas working efficiency and save space for the antenna. Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Description Type 22 RFFE_VIO O Tunable ANT control, MIPI Interface, Power 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 40 of 55 Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Description Type RFFE VIO 56 RFFE_SCLK O Tunable ANT control, MIPI Interface, RFFE clock 58 RFFE_SDATA I/O Tunable ANT control, MIPI Interface, 59 ANTCTL0 61 ANTCTL1 63 ANTCTL2 65 ANTCTL3 RFFE data Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, Bit0 Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, bit1 Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, Bit2 Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, Bit3 O O O O 3.9 Configuration Interface CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V The L860 module provides four configuration pins for the configuration as the WWAN-PCIe, USB3.0 type M.2 module:
Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Type 1 CONFIG_3 O 21 CONFIG_0 O 69 CONFIG_1 75 CONFIG_2 O O
-
-
L
-
NC NC Internally connected to GND NC The M.2 module configuration as the following table:
Config_0 Config_1 Config_2 Config_3 Module Type and
(pin21)
(pin69)
(pin75)
(pin1) Main Host Interface Port Configuration NC GND NC NC WWAN - PCIe Gen2, USB3.0 Vender defined Please refer to PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.1 for more details. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 41 of 55 3.10 Other Interfaces The module does not support other interfaces yet. 4 Radio Frequency 4.1 RF Interface 4.1.1 RF Interface Functionality The L860 module supports four RF connectors used for external antenna connection. As the Figure 4-1 shows, M is for Main antenna, used to receive and transmit RF signals; D/G is for Diversity antenna, used to receive the diversity RF signals. M1 and M2 are used for support 4x4 MIMO data transfer. Figure 4-1 RF connectors 4.1.2 RF Connector Characteristic Rated Condition Environment Condition Frequency Range DC to 6GHz Temperature Range Characteristic Impedance 50 40C to +85C 4.1.3 RF Connector Dimension L860 module adopts standard M.2 module RF connectors, the model name is 818004607 from ECT company, and the connector size is 2*2*0.6m. The connector dimension is shown as following picture:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 42 of 55 Figure 4-2 RF connector dimensions Figure 4-3 0.81mm coaxial antenna dimensions Figure 4-4 Schematic diagram of 0.81mm coaxial antenna connected to the RF connector Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 43 of 55 4.2 Operating Band The L860 module operating bands of the antennas are as follows:
Operating Band Description Mode Tx (MHz) Rx (MHz) Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 7 Band 8 2100MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1920 - 1980 2110 - 2170 1900MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1850 - 1910 1930 - 1990 1800MHz LTE FDD 1710 - 1785 1805 - 1880 1700MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1710 - 1755 2110 - 2155 850MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 824 - 849 869 - 894 2600Mhz LTE FDD 2500 - 2570 2620 - 2690 900MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 880 - 915 925 - 960 Band 12 700MHz LTE FDD 699 - 716 729 - 746 Band 13 700MHz LTE FDD 777 - 787 746 - 756 Band 14 700MHz LTE FDD 788 798 758 768 Band 17 700MHz LTE FDD 704 - 716 734 - 746 Band 18 800MHz LTE FDD 815 - 830 860 - 875 Band 19 800MHz LTE FDD 830 - 845 875 - 890 Band 20 800MHz LTE FDD 832 - 862 791 - 821 Band 25 1900MHz LTE FDD 1850 1915 1930 1995 Band 26 850MHz LTE FDD 814 - 849 859 - 894 Band 28 700MHz LTE FDD 703 - 748 758 - 803 Band 29 700MHz LTE FDD N/A 716 - 728 Band 30 2300MHz LTE FDD 2305 - 2315 2350 - 2360 Band 66 1700MHz LTE FDD 1710 - 1780 2110 - 2200 Band 38 2600MHz LTE TDD Band 39 1900MHZ LTE TDD Band 40 2300MHz LTE TDD Band 41 2500MHZ LTE TDD Band 46 5200MHZ LTE TDD GPS L1
-
-
2570 - 2620 1880 - 1920 2300 - 2400 2496 - 2690 N/A
/
5150 5925 1575.421.023 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 44 of 55 Operating Band Description Mode Tx (MHz) Rx (MHz) GLONASS L1 BeiDou
-
-
-
-
/
/
1602.56254 1561.0982.046 4.3 Transmitting Power The transmitting power for each band of the L860 module as shown in the following table:
Mode Band 3GPP Requirement(dBm) Tx Power(dBm) Note Band 1 24+1.7/-3.7 Band 2 24+1.7/-3.7 WCDMA Band 4 24+1.7/-3.7 Band 5 24+1.7/-3.7 Band 8 24+1.7/-3.7 Band 1 232.7 Band 2 232.7 Band 3 232.7 Band 4 232.7 23.51 23.51 23.51 23.51 23.51 231 231 231 231
-
-
-
-
-
10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 5 232.7 23+2/-1 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 7 232.7 Band 8 232.7 Band 12 232.7 LTE FDD Band 13 232.7 Band 14 232.7 Band 17 232.7 Band 18 232.7 Band 19 232.7 Band 20 232.7 Band 25 232.7 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 26 232.7 23+2/-1 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 28 23+2.7/-3.2 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 45 of 55 Mode Band 3GPP Requirement(dBm) Tx Power(dBm) Note Band 30 232.7 23+1/-2 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 66 232.7 Band 38 232.7 Band 39 232.7 Band 40 232.7 231 231 231 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 41 Normal Mode:232.7 HPUE Mode:262.7 Normal Mode:23+2/-1 HPUE Mode:26+1.5/-1 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB LTE TDD 4.4 Receiver Sensitivity 4.4.1 Dual Antenna Receiver Sensitivity All bands support dual antenna, the receiver sensitivity for each band of L860 module is shown in below table:
Mode Band Band 1 Band 2 WCDMA Band 4 Band 5 Band 8 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 7 Band 8 Band 12 Band 13 Band 14 LTE FDD 3GPP Requirement
(dBm)
-106.7
-104.7
-106.7
-104.7
-103.7
-96.3
-94.3
-93.3
-96.3
-94.3
-94.3
-93.3
-93.3
-93.3
-93.3 Rx Sensitivity(dBm) Typical
-111.0
-110.6
-110
-111.4
-111.4
-101.1
-100.6
-101
-101.5
-103.1
-99
-102.5
-103.2
-103.1
-102.4 Note BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 46 of 55 3GPP Requirement
(dBm)
-93.3
-96.3
-96.3
-93.3
-92.8
-93.8
-94.8
-93.3
-95.3
-95.8
-96.3
-96.3
-96.3
-94.3
-88.5 Rx Sensitivity(dBm) Typical Note
-103.5
-103.1
-103.2
-102.7
-98.5
-103.0
-103.3
--101
--101
-101.5
-100.2
-102.2
-100.1
-99.4
-95.5 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 20MHz Bandwidth Mode Band Band 17 Band 18 Band 19 Band 20 Band 25 Band 26 Band 28 Band 29 Band 30 Band 66 Band 38 Band 39 LTE TDD Band 40 Band 41 Band 46 Note:
The above values are measured in dual antennas condition (Main+Diversity). For single main antenna (without Diversity), the sensitivity will drop about 3dBm for each band of LTE. 4.4.2 Four Antenna Receiver Sensitivity Some middle/high bands support four antenna, the receiver sensitivity for some middle/high bands of L860 module is shown in below table:
Mode Band Middle/High 3GPP Requirement Bands
(dBm) Rx Sensitivity Typical(dBm) Note Band 1 Middle Band Band 2 Middle Band LTE FDD Band 3 Middle Band Band 4 Middle Band
-99
-97
-96
-99
-103.5 10MHz Bandwidth
-104
-103
-104 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth Band 66 Middle Band
-98.5
/
10MHz Bandwidth Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 47 of 55 Mode Band Middle/High 3GPP Requirement Bands
(dBm) Rx Sensitivity Typical(dBm) Note Band 7 High Band Band 30 High Band Band 40 High Band Band 41 High Band
-97
/
-99
-97 LTE TDD
-103 10MHz Bandwidth
/
/
/
10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth
(2540~2655MHz) Note:
The above values are measured in four antennas condition (Main+Diversity+M1+M2). If only use dual antennas (Main+Diversity), the sensitivity will drop about 3dBm for each band of LTE. 4.5 GNSS L860 module supports GNSS/BeiDou and AGNSS functions, and adopts RF Diversity and GNSS/Beidou integrated antenna. Description Power Condition GPS fixing Test Result 130mA / -122dbm GPS tracking 130mA / -122dbm GLONASS fixing 130mA / -122dbm GLONASS tracking 130mA / -122dbm BeiDou fixing 130mA / -122dbm BeiDou tracking 130mA / -122dbm Power GPS Sleep GLONASS Sleep BeiDou Sleep Cold start GPS Warm start TTFF Hot Start Cold start GLONASS Warm start Hot Start 4mA 4mA 4mA 37s / -130dBm 34s / -130dBm 2s / -130dBm 31s / -130dBm 22s / -130dBm 3s / -130dBm Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 48 of 55 Description Condition Cold start BeiDou Warm start Hot Start AGNSS Cold start GPS Sensitivity GLONASS BeiDou Note:
Tracking Acquisition Tracking Acquisition Tracking Acquisition Test Result 148s / -130dBm 148s / -130dBm 3s / -130dBm
/
-160dBm
-149dBm
-160dBm
-146dBm
-160dBm
-141dBm Please note that GPS current is tested with RF disabled. 4.6 Antenna Design The L860module provides main and diversity antenna interfaces, and the antenna design requirements as shown in the following table:
L860 module Main antenna requirements Frequency range The most proper antenna to adapt the frequencies should be used. WCDMA band 1(2100) : 250 MHz WCDMA band 2(1900) : 140 MHz Bandwidth(WCDMA) WCDMA band 4(1700) : 445 MHz WCDMA band 5(850) : 70 MHz WCDMA band 8(900) : 80 MHz LTE band 1(2100): 250 MHz LTE band 2(1900): 140MHz LTE Band 3(1800): 170 MHz Bandwidth(LTE) LTE band 4(1700): 445MHz LTE band 5(850): 70 MHz LTE band 7(2600): 190 MHz LTE Band 8(900): 80 MHz Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 49 of 55 L860 module Main antenna requirements LTE Band 12(700): 47 MHz LTE Band 13(700): 41 MHz LTE Band 14(700): 40 MHz LTE Band 17(700): 42 MHz LTE Band 18(800): 80 MHz LTE Band 19(800): 80 MHz LTE band 20(800): 71 MHz LTE band 25(1900): 145 MHz LTE band 26(850): 80 MHz LTE band 28(700): 100 MHz LTE band 29(700): 12 MHz LTE band 30(2300): 55 MHz LTE band 66(1700): 490MHz LTE band 38(2600): 50 MHz LTE Band 39(1900): 40 MHz LTE band 40(2300): 100 MHz LTE band 41(2500): 194 MHz LTE band 46(5GHz): 775 MHz GPS: 2 MHz Bandwidth(GNSS/BeiDou) GLONASS: 8 MHz Impedance Input power BeiDou: 4 MHz 50 ohm
> 28 dBm average power WCDMA & LTE Recommended standing-wave ratio (SWR) 2:1 Note:
ANT on B30 suggestion: Peak gain<0dBi, for FCC EIRP requirement, Efficient>50% for carrier TRP requirement. If integrator doesn't follow the instruction, Fibocom doesn't take the responsibility. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 50 of 55 5 Structure Specification 5.1 Dimension of Structure The structural dimension of the L860 module is shown in Figure 5-2:
Figure 5-2 Dimension of Structure 5.2 M.2 Interface Model The L860 M.2 module adopts 75-pin gold finger as external interface, where 67 pins are signal pins and 8 pins are notch pins as shown in Figure 3-1. For module dimension, please refer to 5.2 Dimension of Structure. Based on the M.2 interface definition, L860 module adopts Type 3042-S3-B interface (30x42mm, the component maximum height on t top layer is 1.5mm, PCB thickness is 0.8mm, and KEY ID is B). Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 51 of 55 5.3 M.2 Connector The L860 module connects to AP via M.2 connector, it is recommended to use M.2 connector from LOTES company with the model APCI0026-P001A as shown in Figure 5-3. The package of connector, please refer to the specification. Figure 5-3 M.2 Dimension of Structure Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 52 of 55 5.4 Storage 5.4.1 Storage Life Storage Conditions (recommended): Temperature is 23 5 , relative humidity is less than RH 60%. Storage period: Under the recommended storage conditions, the storage life is 12 months. 5.5 Packing The L860 module uses the tray sealed packing, combined with the outer packing method using the hard cartoon box, so that the storage, transportation and the usage of modules can be protected to the greatest extent. Note The module is a precision electronic product, and may suffer permanent damage if no correct electrostatic protection measures are taken. 5.5.1 Tray Package The L860 module uses tray package, 20 pcs are packed in each tray, with 5 trays including one empty tray on top in each box and 5 boxes in each case. Tray packaging process is shown in Figure 5-4:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 53 of 55 Figure 5-4 Tray Packaging Process Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 54 of 55 5.5.2 Tray size The pallet size is 315*170*6.5mm, as shown in Figure 5-5:
Figure 5-5 Tray Size (Unit: mm) ITEM L W H T A B C D E F G DIM(Unit: mm) 315.02.0 170.02.0 6.50.3 0.80.1 43.00.3 31.00.3 79.00.2 60.00.2 180.00.2 60.00.2 40.00.2 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FIBOCOM_L860-GL Hardware User Manual Page 55 of 55
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Internal photos | Internal Photos | 1.06 MiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | External Photos | 393.19 KiB | January 22 2020 / July 20 2020 | delayed release |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | External photo | External Photos | 607.71 KiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label | ID Label/Location Info | 536.98 KiB | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 |
L860-GL-00 _V1.0 V1.0 2018-09-06 NA
: : (R0, G0, B255) (R255, G0, B0) FIBOCOM-SAL-WI-71-Form-02 Page 1 of 3 FIBOCOM-SAL-WI-71-Form-02 Page 2 of 3 0.5mm S/N 10 S/N SN IMEI 15 IMEI S/N IMEI FIBOCOM-SAL-WI-71-Form-02 Page 3 of 3
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Label Location Info | ID Label/Location Info | 48.13 KiB | January 22 2020 |
LabelandLocationforTPNC137 Bottom ContainsFCCID:ZMOL860GL ContainsFibocom RadioModule:L860GL ContainsFCCID:B94AX200D2LZ ContainsIntelRadioModule:AX200D2W ContainsFCCID:ZMOL860GL ContainsFibocom RadioModule:L860GL ContainsFCCID:B94AX200D2LZ ContainsIntelRadioModule:AX200D2W
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Label and location | ID Label/Location Info | 93.35 KiB | April 20 2020 |
Label information ModelHSN-I36C 1. Images of the e-label screen are provided below:
RMNHSN-I36C Contains Intel Radio Model: AX201NGW Contains FCC ID: PD9AX201NG Contains IC: 1000M-AX201NG Contains Fibocom Model: L860-GL Contains FCC ID: ZMOL860GL Contains IC: 21374-L860GL 2. The information that will be displayed on the e-label and information that will remain in the user manual is shown below:
FCC ID/IC number Information on E-label In Manual Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements1 Yes No No Yes No Yes 3. Users are able to access the information in no more than three steps in a devices menu. The actual Steps are: Choose esc or F10 > Advanced > Electronic Labels No special access codes or permissions are required to go through the above steps beyond entering a user-defined password to protect against unauthorized access to the device. 4. The information is stored on the device, no special accessories or supplemental plug-ins
(e.g., a SIM/USIM card) are required to access the information. No. 5. Users are provided specific instructions on how to access the information. The above information must be programmed by the responsible party and the information must be secured in such a manner that third-parties cannot modify it. The e-label information is pre-programmed by the manufacturer. The user cannot modify the e-label Yes. 6. formation.
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Agent Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 63.03 KiB | April 20 2020 |
Date: March 6, 2020 own. Sincerely yours, FCC ID: ZMOL860GL AUTHORIZATION LETTER you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist of BV CPS Taoyuan onon Fibocom Wireless Inc. Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist of BV CPS Taoyuan including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out s relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out s relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out Fibocom Wireless Inc.ss behalf, by Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist of BV CPS Taoyuan on Fibocom Wireless Inc.s behalf, behalf, within the scope of the powers granted herein, shall have the same effect as acts within the scope of the powers granted herein, shall have the same effect as acts of its of its within the scope of the powers granted herein, shall have the same effect as acts of its To Whom It May Concern:
Fibocom Wireless Inc. hereby authorizes Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist of Bureau Veritas Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist of Bureau Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist of Bureau Veritas Veritas BV CPS Taoyuan BV CPS Taoyuan), to
), to act on its act on its Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch (BV CPS Taoyuan), to act on its behalf in all matters relating to the Federal Communication Commission (
behalf in all matters relating to the Federal Communication Commission (FCCFCC)) behalf in all matters relating to the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) application for equipment authorization in connection with the FCC ID listed above, application for equipment authorization in connection with the FCC ID listed above, application for equipment authorization in connection with the FCC ID listed above, E-mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com
26525092
XueShan Huang / Certification Engineer XueShan Huang /
XueShan Huang / Certification Engineer Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom Wireless Inc. Tel: +8675526733555 Tel: +86-755-26525092 Tel: +86 Tel: +86-755755-26525092 E-mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 90.22 KiB | April 20 2020 |
775 Montague Expressway 775 Montague Expressway Milpitas, CA 95035 Milpitas, CA 95035 Milpitas, CA 95035 Tel: 408-526526-1188 Tel: 408 1188 Tel: 408-526-1188 Fax: 408 Fax: 408-526526-10881088 Fax: 408-526-1088 sales.eaw@us.bureauveritas.com sales.eaw@us.bureauveritas.com Project and Product Project and Product Project and Product Authorization Letter Authorization Letter Authorization Letter Representative epresentative Certification Representative Email: sales.eaw@us.bureauveritas.com
775 Montague Expressway
Initial Release (obsolete)
obsolete)
obsolete)
ated letter information (obsolete
Added FCC ID field (obsolete)
Nov-14-2006 Sept25-2007 Jan-31-2012 May-23-2014 Sep-16-2014 Jun-27-2018 Updated company template (obsolete) Updated company template Updated company template ((obsolete) Updated letter information (obsolete) UpdUpdated letter information (obsolete Initial Release (obsolete) Initial Release (obsolete) Revised wording (obsolete) Revised wording Revised wording (obsolete) Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) Updated company name & logo (current) Updated company name & logo (current) Updated company name & logo (current) Added FCC ID field (obsolete) Added FCC ID field (obsolete) 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 Revision History Approved Date From To SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 1 of 2 Rev 6.0 hereby authorize Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Services hereby authorize Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Services Date: 2/11/2020 To: BVCPS, INC. 775 Montague Expressway, Milpitas, CA 95035 USA Dear Sir/Madam, Re: Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Certification Representative Authorization Lette Certification Representative Authorization Letterr We, _Fibocom Wireless Inc._ hereby authorize Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Services, Inc. to act as a Certification Body for certifying for the following project(s):
act as a Certification Body for certifying for the following project(s):
act as a Certification Body for certifying for the following project(s):
FCC ID: ZMOL860GL Product Description: LTE module LTE module LTE module Model: L860-GL Sincerely, ncerely, ncerely,
XueShan Huang / Certification Engineer XueShan Huang /
XueShan Huang / Certification Engineer Certification Engineer Certification Engineer Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom Wireless Inc. Tel: +8675526733555 Tel: +86 Tel: +86-755755-26525092 Tel: +86-755-26525092 E-mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com E-mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com
--------- 26525092 SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 2 of 2 Rev 6.0
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 65.13 KiB | April 20 2020 |
nono other Date: March 6, 2020 hphp) ) to to the certified SUBJECT: FCC Class II Permissive Change We, Fibocom Wireless Inc. hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Permissive Change is Class II Permissive Change is is the certified modulmodule which e which to add a host: Notebook Computer (Model: HSN-I36C / Brand: hp) to the certified module which was originally granted on 09/07/2018 under FCC ID: ZMOL860GL. ZMOL860GL ZMOL860GL. The modules mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically The modules mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically identical identical The modules mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically identical to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom Wireless Inc. take the take the to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Fibocom Wireless Inc. take the responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host. responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host. responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host. Except for the changes mentioned above, no other modification is performed. other modification is performed modification is performed. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Sincerely Yours,
Class II Permissive Change
--------- 26525092
XueShan Huang / Certification Engineer XueShan Huang /
XueShan Huang / Certification Engineer Certification Engineer Certification Engineer Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom Wireless Inc. Tel: +8675526733555 Tel: +86-755-26525092 Tel: +
Tel: +8686--755755-26525092 E-mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com
| 1 2 3 4 5 | SAR Test set-up Photo | Test Setup Photos | 477.25 KiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | SAR Test set-up Photo-Annex F | Test Setup Photos | 431.97 KiB | April 20 2020 / October 17 2020 | delayed release |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | STC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 79.96 KiB | April 20 2020 |
Date: March 6, 2020 u u u u External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road - Gate A Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: ZMOL860GL To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, visions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR visions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.457, 0.459) and Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with 1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with 1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term We are requesting the commission to grant short We are requesting the commission to grant short-term term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 180 days after the Grant Date of confidentiality request on the following attachments until confidentiality request on the following attachments until 180 days after the Gra after the Grant Date of nt Date of Equipment Authorizations. E-mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com
------------------------------------------- 26525092 It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as c correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as c correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. authorization is issued. authorization is issued. Best Regards, Best Regards, Best Regards,
XueShan Huang / Certification Engineer XueShan Huang XueShan Huang / / Certification Fibocom Wireless Inc. Fibocom W Fibocom Wireless Inc. ireless Inc. Tel: +8675526733555 Tel:Tel: +86+86--755755--26525092 Tel: +86-755-26525092 mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 30.82 KiB | January 22 2020 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. Date: Jan. 10, 2020 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 C.C.: SGS Taiwan Limited Subject: Requesting Class II permissive change for FCC ID: ZMOL860GL To Whom It May Concern:
The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID:
ZMOL860GL Original grant date: 11/09/2018, Applicant: Fibocom Wireless Inc. The major change filed under this application is 1. The subject approved module is being used in different host (Portable category Configuration, Host Brand/Model: HP / TPN-C137). 2. SAR Testing is performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. 3. EMC has been evaluated as no degrade the characteristics that reported to the FCC at the initial certification. 4. The difference compared with the original design is adding 2 antennas to this EUT. Antenna is of same type and lower gain from original approval. Laptop mode_WWAN Vendor Antenna Part Number Advanced Wireless & Antenna Inc. Main (PIFA) AML6Y-10057(DC330024W00) Frequency(MHz) 699~716 777~798 814~849 1710~1780 1850~1915 2305~2315 2496~2690 Gain (dBi)
-1.87
-1.31
-3.02 2.39 2.48 2.33
-0.81 Tablet mode_WWAN Vendor Antenna Part Number Advanced Wireless & Antenna Inc. Main (PIFA) AML6Y-10057(DC330024W00) Frequency(MHz) 699~716 777~798 814~849 1710~1780 1850~1915 2305~2315 2496~2690 Gain (dBi)
-11.68
-12.87
-14.01
-3.75
-5.17
-3.09
-7.49 Best Regards
(Signature) XueShan Huang/ Certification Engineer Fibocom Wireless Inc. FIBOCOM
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 47.07 KiB | January 22 2020 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. To:
From: Fibocom Wireless Inc. SGS North America Inc. 620 Old Peachtree Road SUITE 100 Suwanee, Georgia United States 5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Ave 1057 Nanhai Avenue ShenZhen, 518000 China Confidentiality Request regarding application for FCC ID ZMOL860GL Regarding:
LONG TERM CONFIDENTIALITY Pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.459 and 0.457 of the commissions rules, the applicant hereby request confidential treatment of the documents listed below, associated with the certification application referenced above. Antenna Report Tune up procedure The documents above contain proprietary information not released to the public. Public disclosure of this information may prove harmful to the business of the applicant. SHORT TERM CONFIDENTIALITY Additionally, the applicant requests the following documents be held confidential until the device is marketed or 180 days from the grant date, whichever is less. If the device is marketed within 180 days of the Grant Date, the applicant will notify the TCB per FCC KDB 726920 D01 Confidentiality Request Procedures. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User manual(s) Sincerely, ______________________ Printed Name (on file with the FCC associated with the Grantee Code) XueShan Huang Title Certification Engineer Company Name Fibocom Wireless Inc. FIBOCOM
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 79.34 KiB | / March 04 2019 |
FCC, Request for non-disclosure RF_501, Issue 6 Date: 16-Jul-10 Page 1 of 1 Company Name: Fibocom Wireless Inc. Address:
Avenue City:
Country:
Shenzhen China 5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Edisonstraat 12A 6902 PK ZEVENAAR The Netherlands To: Telefication B.V., Dept. FCC TCB Subject: Request for confidentiality FCC ID: ZMOL860GL Reference number: ######
Dear FCC TCB, 1. Long-Term Confidentiality Pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.459(a) & (b), we hereby requests non-disclosure and confidential treatment of the following materials submitted in support of FCC certification application:
Bill(s) of Material Block Diagrams Operational Description Schematic Diagrams Tune-up Procedure Above materials contain secrets, proprietary and technical information, which would customarily be guarded from competitors under 47 CFR, section 0.457(d)(2). Disclosure or publication or any portion of this company confidential material to other parties could cause substantial competitive harm and provide unjustified benefits for competitors. 2. Short-Term Confidentiality (STC) Pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, applicant hereby requests Short-Term Confidential treatment of the following materials (note 1):
Internal Photos Users Manual Test Set-up Photos External Photos Justification:
Planned Release Date STC: (notes 2, 3, 4, 5) Name and signature of applicant: Xueshan Huang Date:2019-03-26 Notes:
1) A document or type of document can only have ONE type of confidentiality!
2) Short-Term confidentiality is in principle for 45 days from date of grant; it can be extended max 3 times (total time 180 days max.)!
3) FCC must be informed when marketing begins earlier. 4) Release takes place automatically thus extension must be requested in time. Telefication does not remind you of this!
5) Request for extension or for release must be received by Telefication at least 7 days before date of actual marketing or before expiration of the STC period FIBOCOM
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Declaration of authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 49.53 KiB | / March 04 2019 |
RF_160, Issue 03 SGS-CSTC Standards Technical Services Co., Ltd. Shenzhen Branch No. 1 Workshop, M-10, Middle section, Science & Technology Park Shenzhen China Fibocom Wireless Inc. 5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Avenue Shenzhen China Declaration of Authorization We Name:
Address:
City:
Country:
Declare that:
Name Representative of agent:
Agent Company name:
Address:
City:
Country is authorized to apply for Certification of the following product(s):
Product description: LTE Module Type designation:
Trademark:
on our behalf. Date:2019-03-20 City:ShenZhen Name:XueShan Huang Function: Certification Engineer Signature:
L860-GL Fibocom
| 1 2 3 4 5 | FCC Modular Approval Request | Cover Letter(s) | 119.27 KiB | / March 04 2019 |
Limited Modular Approval Request FCC (per DA 00-1407) Items to be covered by Limited modular transmitters 1. The modular transmitter must have its own RF shielding. 2. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with Part 15 requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation. 3. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation. 4. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna requirements of Section 15.203 and 15.204(c). The antenna must either be permanently attached or employ a unique antenna coupler (at all connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable).. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the module must not be inside another device during testing. This is intended to demonstrate that the module is capable of complying with Part 15 emission limits regardless of the device into which it is eventually installed. 5. 6. The modular transmitter must be labeled with its own FCC ID number, and, if the FCC ID is not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following: Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: XYZMODEL1 or Contains FCC ID: XYZMODEL1. Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The Grantee may either provide such a label, an example of which must be included in the application for equipment authorization, or, must provide adequate instructions along with the module which explain this requirement. In the latter case, a copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. 7. The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rule or operating requirements applicable to the transmitter and the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to explain any such requirements. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. For example, there are very strict operational and timing requirements that must be met before a transmitter is authorized for operation under Section 15.231. For instance, data transmission is prohibited, except for operation under Section 15.231(e), in which case there are separate field strength level and timing requirements. Compliance with these requirements must be assured. 8. The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements. For example, FCC Rules in Sections 2.1091, 2.1093 and specific Sections of Part 15, including 15.319(i), 15.407(f), 15.253(f) and 15.255(g), require that Unlicensed PCS, UNII and millimeter wave devices perform routine environmental evaluation for RF Exposure to demonstrate compliance. In addition, spread spectrum transmitters operating under Section 15.247 are required to address RF Exposure compliance in accordance with Section 15.247(b)(4). Modular transmitters approved under other Sections of Part 15, when necessary, may also need to address certain RF Exposure concerns, RF_734_00, Issue 1 FCC ID: _ZMOL860GL_ Answer from applicant Y The EUT provides the RF shielding. See EUT photo. Y The EUT has its buffered modulation. Y The EUT has its own power supply regulation, please see the Schematic Diagram. Y The EUT meets the FCC antenna requirements;
unique antenna connector and photo of antenna are shown in the test report. Y The EUT was tested with a test board, Please see test report and setup photo Y please see exhibition label sample for the FCC ID of this module. And also in the exhibition Users manual, there are instructions deliver to the OEM on how to label the end product. Y The EUT is compliant with all applicable FCC rules. Details instructions for maintaining compliance are give in the User Manual. Y The EUT complies with RF exposure requirement. RF_734_00, Issue 1 typically by providing specific installation and operating instructions for users, installers and other interested parties to ensure compliance. Note: If compliance with one or more of the numbered requirements, listed above, cannot be demonstrated, it may be possible to obtain a Limited Modular Approval (LMA). Name and surname of applicant (or authorized representative): _XueShan Huang_ Date:2019-03-20 Signature:
| 1 2 3 4 5 | FCC CIIPC Declaration letter | Cover Letter(s) | 648.85 KiB | / March 04 2019 |
5/F, Tower A, Technology Building II, 1057# Nanhai Avenue, Shenzhen, China Date: 2019/3/15 CIIPC Declaration FCC ID: ZMOL860GL We, FIBOCOM Wireless Inc., hereby declare that we are only and fully responsible for this CIIPC application of FCC ID: ZMOL860GL, originally granted on 09/07/2018. Now we would like to modify the authorized equipment for below changes:
Change full modular to limited modular; Add 2-way BIOS function, this BIOS features is only allow "desktop PC of mobile host" to be recognized. Except for the changes mentioned above, no other modification is performed. In addition, the change does not have any impact on the approved radio parameter such as power, frequency range, modulation etc. Should you have any question, please contact me directly. Sincerely, Signature:
Xueshan Huang / Certification Engineer FIBOCOM Wireless Inc. Tel: +86-755-26733555 Fax: +86-755-26520841 E-mail: keith.huang@fibocom.com FIBOCOM
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change | Cover Letter(s) | 74.32 KiB | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. Request for Class II Permissive Change FCC IDZMOL860GL Date2018-10-11 TOFederal Communication Commission Please be notified that wethe undersignedFibocom Wireless Inc. declare that there is no other hard ware or electrical modification made to the M.2 Module itself except are as below for this Class II permissive change 1. Change the NVM setting to set the B41 the target Max Power from 26dBm to 23dBm. 2. FW version changed to 18600.5001.00.27.00.01 Thank you. Sincerely. By:
(Signature1) Huang Xue Shan
(Print name) Title:
_Certification Engineer__ On behalf of:
Fibocom Wireless Inc.
(Company Name) Telephone: _+86 - 755-26525092_
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Declaration of Identity Disabled HP UE | Cover Letter(s) | 71.57 KiB | July 11 2018 / September 11 2018 |
Declaration of Identity Hereby, Name of manufacturer: Fibocom Wireless Inc. Address:
City:
Country:
5/F, Tower A, Technology Building II, 1057 Nanhai Avenue, Shenzhen China declares that this equipment:
Product description: LTE Module Type designation(s): L860-GL Trademark:
Fibocom is different on Disabled HPUE feature via Software, there is no Hardware change. FW version changed to 18600.5001.00.27.00.01 Date:
City:
Name:
Oct. 11, y2018 Shenzhen Huang XueShan Signature:
| 1 2 3 4 5 | The declaration | Cover Letter(s) | 82.35 KiB | June 09 2018 / July 09 2018 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. Declaration We (Fibocom Wireless Inc.) the undersigned hereby declare, that the equipment
(LTE Module: L860-GL) that operate on the paired 1755-1780 MHz band must be capable of operating on all frequencies in the paired 1710-1780 MHz band, using the same air interfaces that the equipment utilizes on any frequencies in the paired 1710-
1780 MHz band. Signed:
Printed name: Yin JiXiong Place and date of issue 2018-09-03 On behalf of Company name: Fibocom Wireless Inc.
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2020-04-20 | 2572.5 ~ 2617.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
| 2 | 2020-01-22 | 2572.5 ~ 2617.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
| 3 | 2019-04-03 | 2498.5 ~ 2687.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
| 4 | 2018-11-09 | 2572.5 ~ 2617.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
| 5 | 2018-09-07 | 2572.5 ~ 2617.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Effective |
2020-04-20
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
2020-01-22
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
2019-04-03
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
2018-11-09
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
2018-09-07
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Fibocom Wireless Inc.
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0020891057
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Ave 1057 Nanhai Avenue
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Ave
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
ShenZhen
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
ShenZhen, 518000
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
China
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@siemic.com
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
u******@sgs.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
c******@telefication.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Grantee Code |
ZMO
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Product Code |
L860GL
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
X****** H******
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Title |
Regulatory Principal Engineer
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
+8675********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
k******@fibocom.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
SGS Taiwan Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
SGS-CSTC Standards Technical Services Ltd
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
SGS-CSTC Standards Technical ServicesLtd
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
J******** C****
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
J******** h********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
No. 134 Wu Kung Rd. New Taipei Industrial Park
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
No.1 Workshop, M-10, Middle Section
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
No.1 Workshop, M-10, Middle Section, Science &
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
New Taipei City, 24803
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Shenzhen
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
China
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
88622******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
0755-********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
88622********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
0755-********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
j******@sgs.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
j******@sgs.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
SGS Taiwan Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
SGS-CSTC Standards Technical Services Ltd
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
SGS-CSTC Standards Technical ServicesLtd
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
J**** C******
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
J**** h********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
No. 134 Wu Kung Rd. New Taipei Industrial Park
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
No.1 Workshop, M-10, Middle Section
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
No.1 Workshop, M-10, Middle Section, Science &
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
New Taipei City, 24803
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Shenzhen
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
China
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
88622******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
0755-********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
88622********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
0755-********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
j******@sgs.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
j******@sgs.com
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Yes | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | No | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 10/17/2020 | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | 07/20/2020 | |||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | LTE Module | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Yes | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Modular Equipment Type | Single Modular Approval | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Limited Single Modular Approval | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Original Equipment | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Grant Comments | C2PC for adding host (HP Notebook Computer model HSN-I36C). Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum conducted output power. Approval is limited to OEM installation only. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except as evaluated in this filing or in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not exceed a maximum gain of 9.7dBi in 700MHz, 9.36dBi in 800MHz, 5.5dBi in 1.7GHz, 8.50dBi in 1.8GHz, 1dBi in 2.3GHz, and 9dBi in 2.5GHz. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and labeling requirements for finished products. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4, 25, and 66; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5, 12; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7, and TDD LTE 38, and 41; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band13, 14, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26. | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum conducted output power. Approval is limited to OEM installation only. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except as evaluated in this filing or in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not exceed a maximum gain of 9.7dBi in 700MHz, 9.36dBi in 800MHz, 5.5dBi in 1.7GHz, 8.50dBi in 1.8GHz, 1dBi in 2.3GHz, and 9dBi in 2.5GHz. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and labeling requirements for finished products. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4, 25, and 66; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5, 12; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7, and TDD LTE 38, and 41; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band13, 14, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26. Class II Permissive Change based on the filing dated 11/09/2018: Single Modular Approval, address RF Exposure along with the WLAN/BT module (FCC ID: B94-AX200D2LZ) co-location in the host of 2-in-1 tablet(Host Brand/model: HP/TPN-C137) with two new antennas (PIFA Antenna, Supplier: Advanced Wireless & Antenna Inc. Part number: AML6Y-10057(DC330024W00)), as documented in this filing. SAR Testing has been performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. The highest reported Body and Simultaneous SAR values are 0.72W/kg and 1.59W/kg respectively. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change : This change is for alter full modular to limited modular and add 2-way BIOS function. Limited to mobile platform. This device must use a BIOS lock mechanism which ensures that it only operates with the hosts as specified in the Certification filing. Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum conducted output power. Approval is limited to OEM installation only. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except as evaluated in this filing or in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not exceed a maximum gain of 9.7dBi in 700MHz, 9.36dBi in 800MHz, 5.5dBi in 1.7GHz, 8.50dBi in 1.8GHz, 1dBi in 2.3GHz, and 9dBi in 2.5GHz. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and labeling requirements for finished products. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4, 25, and 66; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5, 12; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7, and TDD LTE 38, and 41; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band13, 14, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change : Only firmware is modified to (a) disable HPUE feature and (b) change power output of Band B41 from 26 dBm to 23 dBm. Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum conducted output power. Approval is limited to OEM installation only. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except as evaluated in this filing or in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not exceed a maximum gain of 9.7dBi in 700MHz, 9.36dBi in 800MHz, 5.5dBi in 1.7GHz, 8.50dBi in 1.8GHz, 1dBi in 2.3GHz, and 9dBi in 2.5GHz. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and labeling requirements for finished products. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4, 25, and 66; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5, 12; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7, and TDD LTE 38, and 41; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band13, 14, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum conducted output power. Approval is limited to OEM installation only. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except as evaluated in this filing or in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not exceed a maximum gain of 9.7dBi in 700MHz, 9.36dBi in 800MHz, 5.5dBi in 1.7GHz, 8.50dBi in 1.8GHz, 1dBi in 2.3GHz, and 9dBi in 2.5GHz. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and labeling requirements for finished products. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4, 25, and 66; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5, 12; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7, and TDD LTE 38, and 41; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band13, 14, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
SGS-CSTC Standards Technical Services Co., Ltd
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
SGS Taiwan Ltd.
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
K**** X********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
R****** W********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
+86 (********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
+886-********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
K******@sgs.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
R******@sgs.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.211 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.21 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 3 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.237 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 4 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 2M71W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 5 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.241 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 6 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.156 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 7 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 8 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 9 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.166 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.246 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.24 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 12 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 13 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.248 | 0.1 ppm | 4M47G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 14 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 15 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 16 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.249 | 0.1 ppm | 4M46G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 17 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 18 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.195 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 19 | 9 | 790.5 | 790.5 | 0.245 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 9 | 790.5 | 790.5 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 21 | 9 | 790.5 | 790.5 | 0.238 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 22 | 9 | 790.5 | 790.5 | 0.185 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 23 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.154 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.12 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 26 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 27 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 28 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.158 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.191 | 0.1 ppm | 1M10W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 3 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.232 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 31 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.188 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 32 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.244 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 33 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.2 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 34 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.239 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 35 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.157 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 36 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.167 | 0.1 ppm | 4M48W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 37 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 38 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.165 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 39 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.221 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 4 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.175 | 0.1 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 41 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.216 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 42 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.14 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 43 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.396 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 44 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.344 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 45 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 46 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.242 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 47 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.211 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 2 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.21 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 3 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.237 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 4 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.237 | 0.1 ppm | 2M71W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 5 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.241 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 6 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.156 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 7 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 8 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 9 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.166 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.246 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.24 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 12 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 13 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.248 | 0.1 ppm | 4M47G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 14 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 15 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 16 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.249 | 0.1 ppm | 4M46G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 17 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 18 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.195 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 19 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.245 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 2 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 21 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.238 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 22 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.185 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 23 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.154 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.12 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 26 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 27 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 28 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.158 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.191 | 0.1 ppm | 1M10W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 3 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.232 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 31 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.188 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 32 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.244 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 33 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.2 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 34 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.239 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 35 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.157 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 36 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.167 | 0.1 ppm | 4M48W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 37 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 38 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.165 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 39 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.221 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 4 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.175 | 0.1 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 41 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.216 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 42 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.14 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 43 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.259 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 44 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.219 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 45 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 46 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.242 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 47 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.211 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 2 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.21 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 3 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.237 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 4 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 2M71W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 5 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.241 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 6 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.156 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 7 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 8 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 9 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.166 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.246 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.24 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 12 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 13 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.248 | 0.1 ppm | 4M47G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 14 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 15 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 16 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.249 | 0.1 ppm | 4M46G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 17 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 18 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.195 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 19 | 27 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.245 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 2 | 27 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 21 | 27 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.238 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 22 | 27 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.185 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 23 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.154 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.12 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 26 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 27 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 28 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.158 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.191 | 0.1 ppm | 1M10W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 3 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.232 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 31 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.188 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 32 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.244 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 33 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.2 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 34 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.239 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 35 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.157 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 36 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.167 | 0.1 ppm | 4M48W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 37 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 38 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.165 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 39 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.221 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 4 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.175 | 0.1 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 41 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.216 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 42 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.14 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 43 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.396 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 44 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.344 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 45 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 46 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.242 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 47 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.211 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 2 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.21 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 3 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.237 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 4 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 2M71W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 5 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.241 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 6 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.156 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 7 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 8 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 9 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.166 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.246 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.24 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 12 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 13 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.248 | 0.1 ppm | 4M47G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 14 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 15 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 16 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.249 | 0.1 ppm | 4M46G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 17 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 18 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.195 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 19 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.245 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 2 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 21 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.238 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 22 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.185 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 23 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.154 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.12 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 26 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 27 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 28 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.158 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.191 | 0.1 ppm | 1M10W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 3 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.232 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 31 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.188 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 32 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.244 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 33 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.2 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 34 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.239 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 35 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.157 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 36 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.167 | 0.1 ppm | 4M48W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 37 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 38 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.165 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 39 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.221 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 4 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.175 | 0.1 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 41 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.216 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 42 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.14 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 43 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.259 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 44 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.219 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 45 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 46 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.242 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 47 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.211 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 2 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.21 | 0.1 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 3 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.237 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 4 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 2M71W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 5 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.241 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 6 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.156 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 7 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 8 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 9 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.166 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.246 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.24 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 12 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 13 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.248 | 0.1 ppm | 4M47G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 14 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 15 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 16 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.249 | 0.1 ppm | 4M46G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 17 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 18 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.195 | 0.1 ppm | 8M89W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 19 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.245 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 2 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.194 | 0.1 ppm | 4M49W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 21 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.238 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 22 | 9 | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.185 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 23 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.154 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.12 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 26 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.247 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 27 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.199 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 28 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.158 | 0.1 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.191 | 0.1 ppm | 1M10W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 3 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.232 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 31 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.188 | 0.1 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 32 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.244 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 33 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.2 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 34 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.239 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 35 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.157 | 0.1 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 36 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.167 | 0.1 ppm | 4M48W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 37 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 8M93G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 38 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.165 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 39 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.221 | 0.1 ppm | 8M95G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 4 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.175 | 0.1 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 41 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.216 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 42 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.14 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 43 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.396 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 44 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.344 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 45 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.198 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 46 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.242 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 47 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.196 | 0.1 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC